all | frequencies |
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 |
|
UserMan Statements | Users Manual | 851.80 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 |
|
UserMan1 | Users Manual | 2.72 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 |
|
UserMan2 | Users Manual | 1.79 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 | Operational Description | |||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
1 2 3 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 | Internal Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report |
1 2 3 | UserMan Statements | Users Manual | 851.80 KiB |
SIMATIC HMI Mobile Panel 277 IWLAN, Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Produktinformation Gltigkeit Diese Produktinformation enthlt wichtige Hinweise. Die Produktinformation ist gltig fr folgende Bediengerte:
Mobile Panel 277 IWLAN, Bestellnummern 6AV6 645-0DD01-0AX0 und 6AV6 645-0DE01-0AX0. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN, Bestellnummern 6AV6 645-0DB01-0AX0 und 6AV6 645-0DC01-0AX0 Funkzulassungen VORSICHT Die folgende bersicht informiert Sie ber die mglichen Funkzulassungen. Fr das Bediengert selbst gelten nur die jeweils auf der Gerterckseite angegebenen Funkzulassungen. CE-Zulassung Die Produkte Mobile Panel 277 IWLAN, Bestellnummern 6AV6 645-0DD01-0AX0 und 6AV6 645-0DE01-0AX0. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN, Bestellnummern 6AV6 645-0DB01-0AX0 und 6AV6 645-0DC01-0AX0 stimmen in der von Siemens A&D in Verkehr gebrachten Ausfhrung mit den Vorschriften der folgenden europischen Richtlinie berein:
99/5/EG Richtlinie des europischen Parlaments und des Rates zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften der Mitgliedstaaten ber Funkanlagen und Telekommunikationsendeinrichtungen und die gegenseitige Anerkennung ihrer Konformitt. Die Konformitt mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen der Richtlinie wird nachgewiesen durch die Einhaltung folgender Normen:
EN 60950 EN 301489-1 EN 301489-17 Sicherheit von Einrichtungen der Informationstechnik Elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit fr Funkeinrichtungen und -dienste Spezifische Bedingungen fr Breitband-Datenbertragungssysteme und fr Einrichtungen in lokalen Hochleistungs-Funknetzen (HIPERLAN) Elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit und Funkspektrumangelegenheiten Breitband-Funkzugangsnetze (BRAN) - 5-GHz-Hochleistungs-RLAN bereinstimmung von elektronischen und elektrischen Gerten kleiner Leistung mit den Basisgrenzwerten fr die Sicherheit von Personen in elektromagnetischen Feldern (10 MHz bis 300 GHz) Empfehlung des Rates zur Begrenzung der Exposition der Bevlkerung gegenber elektromagnetischen Feldern (0 Hz . 300 GHz) EN 300328 EN 301893 EN 50371 1999/519/EC An das System angeschlossene Gerte mssen die relevanten Sicherheitsbestimmungen erfllen. Siemens 2008 A5E01004934-01, 04/2008 1 EG-Konformittserklrung Die EG-Konformittserklrung wird gem den obengenannten EG- Richtlinien fr die zustndigen Behrden zur Verfgung gehalten bei:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Bereich Automatisierungstechnik A&D AS RD ST Postfach 1963 D-92209 Amberg Diese Erklrung bescheinigt die bereinstimmung mit den genannten Richtlinien, ist jedoch keine Zusicherung von Eigenschaften. Sie finden die EG-Konformittserklrung zum Download im Internet unter http://support.automation.siemens.com. UL-Zulassung Underwriters Laboratories Inc. nach UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment) CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment) Die Zulassung wird nur bei Betrieb mit Batterie oder stationr in der Ladestation erfllt. FCC-Zulassung This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by SIEMENS may void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment. Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device has been shown to be capable of compliance for localized specific absorption rate (SAR) for uncontrolled environment / general public exposure limits specific in ANSI/IEEE C95.1-1992 and had been tested in accordance with the measurement procedures specified in IEEE Std. 1528-2003 December 2003. IC-Zulassung Kanada Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals:
The wireless device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limit for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Ministry of Health (Canada), Safety Code 6. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and established permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. These guidelines are based on the safety standards previously set by international standard bodies. These standards include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. This device and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This device has been shown to be capable of compliance for localized specific absorption rate (SAR) for uncontrolled environment / general public exposure limits specific in ANSI/IEEE C95.1-1992 and had been tested in accordance with the measurement procedures specified in IEEE Std. 1528-2003. 2 Mobile Panel 277 IWLAN, Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN A5E01004934-01, 04/2008 Lnderzulassungen VORSICHT Die folgende bersicht informiert Sie ber die mglichen Funkzulassungen in verschiedenen Lndern. Fr das Bediengert selbst gelten nur die jeweils auf der Gerterckseite angegebenen Funkzulassungen. Fr die Produkte Mobile Panel 277 IWLAN, Bestellnummern 6AV6 645-0DD01-0AX0 und 6AV6 645-0DE01-0AX0. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN, Bestellnummern 6AV6 645-0DB01-0AX0 und 6AV6 645-0DC01-0AX0 ist die Funkzulassung in folgenden Lndern vorgesehen:
Land Australien Belgien Deutschland Dnemark Finnland Frankreich Griechenland Grobritannien Irland Island Italien Japan Kanada Liechtenstein Kennzeichnung IC Kennzeichnung Land Luxemburg Niederlande Norwegen sterreich Portugal Schweden Schweiz Spanien Sdafrika Taiwan Tschechien Trkei Ungarn Vereinigte Staaten von Amerika Verwendete Open Source Software Copyright Auf dem Bediengert befindet sich Software, fr die folgendes Copyright gilt:
Copyright (c) 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Mobile Panel 277 IWLAN, Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN A5E01004934-01, 04/2008 3 SIMATIC HMI Mobile Panel 277 IWLAN, Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Product Information Validity This product information contains important information. This product information applies to the following HMI devices:
Mobile Panel 277 IWLAN, order numbers 6AV6 645-0DD01-0AX0 and 6AV6 645-0DE01-0AX0. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN, order numbers 6AV6 645-0DB01-0AX0 and 6AV6 645-0DC01-0AX0 Wireless approvals CAUTION The following overview shows possible wireless approvals. The HMI device itself is certified in accordance with the wireless approvals shown on the rear panel labels. CE approval The products Mobile Panel 277 IWLAN, order numbers 6AV6 645-0DD01-0AX0 and 6AV6 645-0DE01-0AX0. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN, order numbers 6AV6 645-0DB01-0AX0 and 6AV6 645-0DC01-0AX0 in the version put into circulation by Siemens A&D conform to the regulations of the following European directive:
99/5/EC Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council relating to Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment and the Mutual Recognition of their Conformity. Compatibility with the basic requirements of the guideline is verified by compliance with the following standards:
EN 60950 EN 301489-1 EN 301489-17 Safety of Information Technology Equipment Electromagnetic Compatibility for Radio Equipment and Services Specific requirements for broadband data transmission systems and for equipment in local high-
performance radio networks (HIPERLAN) Electromagnetic Compatibility and Radio Spectrum Issues Broadband radio access networks (BRAN) 5 GHz high-performance RLAN Compliance of low power electronic and electrical apparatus with the basic restrictions related to human exposure to electromagnetic fields (10 MHz to 300 GHz) Council recommendation on the limitation of exposure of the general public to electromagnetic fields
(0 Hz to 300 GHz) EN 300328 EN 301893 EN 50371 1999/519/EC Devices connected to the system must meet the relevant safety regulations. 4 Siemens 2008 A5E01004934-01, 04/2008 EC Declaration of Conformity The EC Declaration of Conformity is available for the responsible authorities according to the above-mentioned EC Directive at the following address:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Automation & Drives A&D AS RD ST PO Box 1963 D-92209 Amberg, Germany This declaration certifies compliance with the directives named above, but does not guarantee any specific properties. To download information on the EC Declaration of Conformity, go to http://support.automation.siemens.com. UL approval Underwriters Laboratories Inc., to UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment) CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment) The approval is only valid in the case of battery operation or when stationary in the charging station. FCC approval This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by SIEMENS may void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment. Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device has been shown to be capable of compliance for localized specific absorption rate (SAR) for uncontrolled environment / general public exposure limits specific in ANSI/IEEE C95.1-1992 and had been tested in accordance with the measurement procedures specified in IEEE Std. 1528-2003 December 2003. IC approval Canada Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals:
The wireless device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limit for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Ministry of Health (Canada), Safety Code 6. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and established permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. These guidelines are based on the safety standards previously set by international standard bodies. These standards include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. This device and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This device has been shown to be capable of compliance for localized specific absorption rate (SAR) for uncontrolled environment / general public exposure limits specific in ANSI/IEEE C95.1-1992 and had been tested in accordance with the measurement procedures specified in IEEE Std. 1528-2003. Mobile Panel 277 IWLAN, Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN A5E01004934-01, 04/2008 5 National approvals CAUTION The following overview shows possible wireless approvals in a number of different countries. The HMI device itself is certified in accordance with the wireless approvals shown on the rear panel labels. For the products Mobile Panel 277 IWLAN, order numbers 6AV6 645-0DD01-0AX0 and 6AV6 645-0DE01-0AX0. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN, order numbers 6AV6 645-0DB01-0AX0 and 6AV6 645-0DC01-0AX0 wireless approval is intended for the following countries:
Identification Country Australia Belgium Germany Denmark Finland France Greece Great Britain Ireland Iceland Italy Japan Canada Liechtenstein IC Country Luxembourg The Netherlands Norway Austria Portugal Sweden Switzerland Spain South Africa Taiwan Czech Republic Turkey Hungary United States of America Identification Open Source Software used Copyright The HMI device includes software to which the following copyright applies:
Copyright (c) 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Siemens AG Automation and Drives Postfach 48 48 90327 NRNBERG 6 Mobile Panel 277 IWLAN, Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN A5E01004934-01, 04/2008
1 2 3 | UserMan1 | Users Manual | 2.72 MiB |
SIMATIC HMI HMI device Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions Order No.: 6AV6691-1DQ01-2AA0 12/2007 A5E01003940-01 Preface Overview Safety instructions, standards and notes Planning application Installation and connection Operator controls and displays Configuring the operating system Commissioning the HMI device Fail-safe mode Operating a project Operating alarms Operating recipes Maintenance and care Technical specifications Appendix Abbreviations 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 B C Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into account. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards. Prescribed Usage Note the following:
WARNING This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance. Trademarks All names identified by are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Automation and Drives Postfach 48 48 90327 NRNBERG GERMANY Ordernumber: A5E01003940-01 01/2008 Copyright Siemens AG 2007. Technical data subject to change Preface Purpose of the operating instructions These operating instructions provide information based on the requirements defined by DIN EN 62079 for mechanical engineering documentation. This information relates to the place of use, transport, storage, mounting, use and maintenance. These operating instructions are intended for the following user groups:
Operators The operator operates and monitors the system during the process control phase. The following chapters are relevant to the operator:
Operator controls and displays Fail-safe operation Operating a project Operating recipes Operating alarms Commissioning engineers The commissioning engineer integrates the HMI device into the system and ensures the operating capability of the HMI device for the process control phase. All the operating instructions are relevant for the commissioning engineer. Depending on the use of the HMI device, certain chapters may not be of relevance to the commissioning engineer, for example the chapter "Maintenance and servicing". Service technicians Service technicians rectify faults that occur during the process control phase. The entire set of operating instructions is relevant to service technicians in principle. Depending on the use of the HMI device, however, certain chapters may not be relevant to them, for example the chapter on "Maintenance and care". Maintenance technicians Maintenance technicians carry out regular maintenance work during the process control phase. The chapter on "Maintenance and care" is relevant to maintenance technicians. The chapter "Safety instructions, standards and information" should be particularly heeded by all person groups. The help integrated in WinCC flexible, the WinCC flexible Information System, contains detailed information. The information system contains instructions, examples and reference information in electronic form. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 3 Preface Basic knowledge required General knowledge of automation technology and process communication is needed to understand the operating instructions. It is also assumed that those using the manual have experience in using personal computers and knowledge of Microsoft operating systems. Scope of the operating instructions These operating instructions apply to the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN HMI device in combination with the WinCC flexible software package. For fail-safe operation, the information in the function manual "Fail-safe operation of the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN" applies. Position in the information landscape These operating instructions form part of the SIMATIC HMI documentation. The following information provides you with an overview of the SIMATIC HMI information landscape. User manuals WinCC flexible Micro Describes basic principles of configuration using the WinCC flexible Micro Engineering System. WinCC flexible Compact/ Standard/ Advanced Describes basic principles of configuration using the WinCC flexible Compact Engineering System/WinCC flexible Standard/WinCC flexible Advanced. WinCC flexible Runtime Describes how to commission and operate your runtime project on a PC. WinCC flexible Migration Describes how to convert an existing ProTool project or WinCC project to WinCC flexible. Communication Communication Part 1 describes the connection of the HMI device to SIMATIC PLCs. Communication Part 2 describes the connection of the HMI device to third-party PLCs. Getting started WinCC flexible for first time users Based on an example project, this is a step-by-step introduction to the basics of configuring screens, alarms, recipes and screen navigation. WinCC flexible for power users Based on an example project, this is a step-by-step introduction to the basics of configuring logs, project reports, scripts, user management, multilingual projects and integration in STEP 7. WinCC flexible options 4 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Preface Based on an example project, this is a step-by-step introduction to the basics of configuring the WinCC flexible Sm@rtServices, Sm@rtAccess and OPC server options. Mobile Panel 277 IWLAN Introduces project design for WLAN communication step by step using a sample structure. Operating instructions Operating instructions for SIMATIC HMI devices OP 73, OP 77A, OP 77B TP 170micro, TP 170A, TP 170B, OP 170B OP 73micro, TP 177micro TP 177A, TP 177B, OP 177B TP 270, OP 270 TP 277, OP 277 MP 270B MP 277 MP 370 MP 377 Operating instructions for mobile SIMATIC HMI devices Mobile Panel 177 Mobile Panel 277 Mobile Panel 277 IWLAN Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating instructions (compact) for SIMATIC HMI devices OP 77B Mobile Panel 177 Mobile Panel 277 Operating instructions for SIMATIC accessories Industrial USB Hub 4 Function manual Fail-safe operation of the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Online availability Technical documentation on SIMATIC products and SIMATIC systems is available in PDF format in various languages at the following addresses:
SIMATIC Guide Technical Documentation in German:
"http://www.ad.siemens.de/simatic/portal/html_00/techdoku.htm"
SIMATIC Guide for Technical Documentation in English:
"http://www.ad.siemens.de/simatic/portal/html_76/techdoku.htm"
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 5 The HMI device is sometimes shown in the form of photographs in these operating instructions. The photographs of the HMI device may differ slightly from the factory state of the HMI device. Configuration and runtime software differ with regard to their names as follows:
"WinCC flexible 2007" for example, refers to the configuration software The term "WinCC flexible" is used in a general context. The full name, for example
"WinCC flexible 2007", is always used when it is necessary to differentiate between different versions of the configuration software.
"WinCC flexible Runtime" refers to the runtime software that can run on HMI devices The name "Mobile Panel 277 Wireless" is the collective term for the following HMI devices:
Mobile Panel 277 IWLAN Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN The following text notation will facilitate reading these operating instructions:
Notation
"Add screen"
"File > Edit"
Scope Terminology that appears in the user interface, for example dialog names, tabs, buttons, menu entries Inputs required, for example limit values, tag values Path information Operational sequences, for example, menu commands, context menu commands Keyboard operation
<F1>, <Alt+P>
Please observe notes labeled as follows:
Preface Photos Conventions Note Notes contain important information concerning the product, its use or a specific section of the documentation to which you should pay particular attention. Registered trademarks Names labeled with a symbol are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. Other names used in this documentation may be trademarks, the use of which by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. HMI SIMATIC SIMATIC HMI SIMATIC ProTool WinCC 6 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Representatives and offices Preface If you have any further questions relating to the products described in this manual, please contact your local representative at the Siemens branch nearest you. Your Siemens representative can be found at "http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner". Training center Siemens AG offers a variety of training courses to familiarize you with automation systems. Please contact your regional training center, or our central training center in 90327 Nuremberg, Germany, for details. Phone: +49 (911) 895-3200 Internet: "http://www.sitrain.com"
Technical support You can find technical support for all A&D projects Using the support request form on the web at:
"http://www.siemens.de/automation/support-request"
Phone: + 49 180 5050 222 Fax: + 49 180 5050 223 Further information about our technical support is available on the Internet at
"http://www.siemens.com/automation/service". Service & Support on the Internet Service & Support provides additional comprehensive information on SIMATIC products through online services at "http://www.siemens.com/automation/support":
Newsletters with the latest information about your products A large document base is available using our Service & Support search engine A forum for global exchange of information by users and experts Current product information, FAQs and downloads Your local Automation & Drives representative Information about field service, repairs, spare parts and much more under the heading
"Services"
Recycling and disposal Due to the low levels of pollutants in the HMI devices described in these operating instructions, they can be recycled. For environment-friendly recycling and disposal of your old equipment, contact a certified disposal facility for electronic scrap. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 7 2 3 Table of contents 1 Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 3 Overview.................................................................................................................................................. 17 Product overview .........................................................................................................................17 1.1 Design of the HMI device.............................................................................................................18 1.2 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN...........................................................................................................18 1.2.1 1.2.2 Supplementary pack and other accessories................................................................................20 Battery..........................................................................................................................................22 1.2.3 Charging station...........................................................................................................................22 1.2.4 1.3 Configuration and process control phase ....................................................................................24 Transponder.................................................................................................................................25 1.4 Ranges in the plant ......................................................................................................................27 1.5 1.6 Fail-safe operation .......................................................................................................................28 Functional scope with WinCC flexible..........................................................................................29 1.7 Software options ..........................................................................................................................32 1.8 1.9 Communication ............................................................................................................................32 Safety instructions, standards and notes ................................................................................................. 35 Safety instructions........................................................................................................................35 2.1 2.2 Standards, certificates and approvals..........................................................................................37 Operating safety...........................................................................................................................39 2.3 Power supply................................................................................................................................40 2.4 2.5 Notes about usage.......................................................................................................................42 Risk analysis ................................................................................................................................43 2.6 Safety functions of the emergency stop button............................................................................43 2.7 2.8 Enabling button ............................................................................................................................44 Electromagnetic compatibility ......................................................................................................46 2.9 2.10 Transport and storage conditions ................................................................................................48 Planning application................................................................................................................................. 51 Application and ambient conditions .............................................................................................51 3.1 Mounting location and clearance of charging station ..................................................................54 3.2 3.3 Information on insulation tests, protection class and degree of protection..................................56 Rated voltages .............................................................................................................................57 3.4 Required properties of the WLAN connection .............................................................................57 3.5 3.6 Effective ranges and zones..........................................................................................................58 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 9 Table of contents Division of the system into effective ranges and zones.............................................................. 58 3.6.1 Distance measurement between HMI device and transponder.................................................. 61 3.6.2 3.6.3 Planning effective ranges............................................................................................................ 62 Installation and connection ...................................................................................................................... 65 4.1 Checking the package contents.................................................................................................. 65 Mounting the charging station..................................................................................................... 66 4.2 Setting transponder ID and inserting the battery ........................................................................ 66 4.3 4.4 Mounting the transponder ........................................................................................................... 69 Electrical installation.................................................................................................................... 69 4.5 Connection of the charging station to the power supply............................................................. 70 4.6 4.7 Connecting the HMI device......................................................................................................... 71 Opening and closing the terminal compartment ......................................................................... 71 4.7.1 Interfaces of the HMI device ....................................................................................................... 76 4.7.2 Connecting the configuring PC ................................................................................................... 77 4.7.3 Connecting the PLC.................................................................................................................... 79 4.7.4 4.7.5 Connecting the printer................................................................................................................. 80 Connecting USB devices ............................................................................................................ 81 4.7.6 Connecting the tabletop power supply unit................................................................................. 82 4.7.7 Inserting, charging and changing the battery.............................................................................. 83 4.8 4.8.1 Safety instructions....................................................................................................................... 83 Inserting batteries for the first time.............................................................................................. 85 4.8.2 Displaying battery status............................................................................................................. 87 4.8.3 Changing the main battery.......................................................................................................... 88 4.8.4 4.8.5 Changing the bridging battery..................................................................................................... 89 4.9 Switching on and testing the HMI device.................................................................................... 91 Operator controls and displays ................................................................................................................ 95 5.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 95 Displays on the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN................................................................................ 96 5.2 Power management.................................................................................................................... 98 5.3 5.4 Safety-related operator controls................................................................................................ 100 Emergency stop button ............................................................................................................. 100 5.4.1 Enabling button ......................................................................................................................... 102 5.4.2 Operator controls ...................................................................................................................... 104 5.5 5.5.1 Handwheel ................................................................................................................................ 104 Key-operated switch.................................................................................................................. 105 5.5.2 Illuminated pushbutton.............................................................................................................. 106 5.5.3 5.5.4 Evaluation of the operator controls ........................................................................................... 107 5.5.4.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 107 5.5.4.2 Evaluating operator controls as direct keys .............................................................................. 107 5.5.4.3 Activation of function key LEDs using system functions........................................................... 110 5.5.4.4 Evaluation of the handwheel with system functions ................................................................. 111 5.5.4.5 Evaluation of the key-operated switch with system functions................................................... 112 5.5.4.6 Evaluation and activation of the illuminated pushbuttons......................................................... 112 Using a memory card with the HMI device ............................................................................... 113 5.6 5.7 Labeling the function keys......................................................................................................... 116 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 4 5 10 6 Table of contents Holding the mobile panel and fixing it to the wall.......................................................................118 5.8 Charging station.........................................................................................................................120 5.9 Charging batteries in the charging compartment.......................................................................120 5.9.1 Displays on the charging station................................................................................................122 5.9.2 5.9.3 Locking the charging station ......................................................................................................123 Configuring the operating system .......................................................................................................... 125 Loader........................................................................................................................................125 6.1 WLAN.........................................................................................................................................128 6.2 6.2.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................128 Parameterizing the WLAN connection.......................................................................................131 6.2.2 Control Panel .............................................................................................................................135 6.3 Overview ....................................................................................................................................135 6.3.1 6.3.2 Reference...................................................................................................................................136 Operating the Control Panel ......................................................................................................137 6.3.3 Changing settings for operation.................................................................................................140 6.4 Configuring the screen keyboard...............................................................................................140 6.4.1 6.4.2 Setting the character repeat rate of the screen keyboard .........................................................141 Setting the double-click..............................................................................................................143 6.4.3 Calibrating the touch screen ......................................................................................................144 6.4.4 6.5 Changing password protection ..................................................................................................146 Changing HMI device settings ...................................................................................................147 6.6 Setting the date and time...........................................................................................................147 6.6.1 Changing regional settings ........................................................................................................149 6.6.2 Backup registry information .......................................................................................................150 6.6.3 6.6.4 Changing screen settings ..........................................................................................................151 Setting the screen saver ............................................................................................................152 6.6.5 Changing the printer properties .................................................................................................154 6.6.6 Restarting the HMI device..........................................................................................................156 6.6.7 6.6.8 Displaying information about the HMI device ............................................................................157 6.6.9 Displaying system properties.....................................................................................................158 6.6.10 Activating vibration alarm...........................................................................................................159 6.7 Programming the data channel..................................................................................................160 Setting the delay time ................................................................................................................162 6.8 Setting the PROFIsafe address .................................................................................................164 6.9 6.10 Enabling PROFINET IO.............................................................................................................165 6.11 Configuring network operation...................................................................................................167 6.11.1 Overview of network operation ..................................................................................................167 6.11.2 Setting the device name of the HMI device ...............................................................................168 6.11.3 Changing the network configuration ..........................................................................................169 6.11.4 Changing the logon data............................................................................................................171 6.11.5 Changing e-mail settings ...........................................................................................................172 6.12 Changing internet settings .........................................................................................................173 6.12.1 Changing internet settings .........................................................................................................173 6.12.2 Setting the proxy server.............................................................................................................174 6.12.3 Changing data protection settings .............................................................................................175 Importing and deleting certificates .............................................................................................176 6.12.4 6.13 Backing up and restoring with an external memory medium ....................................................177 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 11 Table of contents 6.14 Displaying battery status........................................................................................................... 181 6.15 Activate memory management ................................................................................................. 182 Commissioning the HMI device ............................................................................................................. 185 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 185 7.1 7.2 Operating modes....................................................................................................................... 186 Using existing projects .............................................................................................................. 187 7.3 7.4 Data transmission options......................................................................................................... 188 Preparing and backing up a project .......................................................................................... 189 7.5 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 189 7.5.1 7.5.2 Transfer..................................................................................................................................... 190 7.5.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 190 7.5.2.2 Starting manual transfer............................................................................................................ 190 7.5.2.3 Starting automatic transfer........................................................................................................ 191 7.5.2.4 Starting backtransfer................................................................................................................. 193 Testing a project........................................................................................................................ 194 7.5.3 7.5.4 Acceptance of the system......................................................................................................... 196 7.5.4.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 196 7.5.4.2 Accepting effective ranges and transponders........................................................................... 196 7.5.4.3 Testing effective ranges............................................................................................................ 199 7.5.5 Testing zones............................................................................................................................ 200 7.5.6 Backup and restore................................................................................................................... 200 7.5.6.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 200 7.5.6.2 Backup and restore using WinCC flexible................................................................................. 201 7.5.6.3 Backup and restore using ProSave .......................................................................................... 203 7.5.7 Updating the operating system ................................................................................................. 204 7.5.7.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 204 7.5.7.2 Updating the operating system using WinCC flexible............................................................... 206 7.5.7.3 Updating the operating system using ProSave......................................................................... 207 7.5.7.4 Resetting to factory settings with WinCC flexible...................................................................... 208 7.5.7.5 Resetting to factory settings with ProSave ............................................................................... 210 7.5.8 Installing and removing options ................................................................................................ 212 7.5.8.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 212 Installing and removing options using WinCC flexible .............................................................. 212 7.5.8.2 7.5.8.3 Installing and removing options using ProSave........................................................................ 214 7.5.9 Transferring and transferring back license keys ....................................................................... 215 7.5.9.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 215 7.5.9.2 Transferring and transferring back license keys ....................................................................... 216 Fail-safe mode....................................................................................................................................... 219 Organizational measures .......................................................................................................... 219 8.1 Switch-off behavior.................................................................................................................... 220 8.2 8.3 Integrating the HMI device ........................................................................................................ 222 Removing the HMI device......................................................................................................... 223 8.4 8.5 Logging onto and off from the effective range .......................................................................... 224 8.6
"Override" mode........................................................................................................................ 226 Operating a project ................................................................................................................................ 231 9.1 Starting the project.................................................................................................................... 231 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 7 8 9 12 Table of contents Error cases.................................................................................................................................232 9.2 Direct keys .................................................................................................................................234 9.3 Operator input options ...............................................................................................................235 9.4 Function keys.............................................................................................................................237 9.5 Setting the project language ......................................................................................................238 9.6 Input ...........................................................................................................................................239 9.7 Overview ....................................................................................................................................239 9.7.1 Entering and editing numerical values.......................................................................................240 9.7.2 Entering and editing alphanumerical values..............................................................................242 9.7.3 Entering the date and time.........................................................................................................243 9.7.4 Entering symbolic values ...........................................................................................................244 9.7.5 Displaying infotext......................................................................................................................244 9.8 Device-specific displays.............................................................................................................246 9.9 Displaying battery status............................................................................................................246 9.9.1 Displaying WLAN quality............................................................................................................246 9.9.2 Displaying the effective range name..........................................................................................247 9.9.3 Displaying the effective range quality ........................................................................................248 9.9.4 Displaying zone names..............................................................................................................249 9.9.5 Displaying zone quality ..............................................................................................................250 9.9.6 Bar and gauge ...........................................................................................................................251 9.10 Operating the slider control........................................................................................................252 9.11 Operating the switch ..................................................................................................................253 9.12 Operating the trend view............................................................................................................254 9.13 9.14 Operating the Status Force........................................................................................................256 9.14.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................256 9.14.2 Operation ...................................................................................................................................258 9.15 Operating the Sm@rtClient view ...............................................................................................259 9.15.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................259 9.15.2 Operation ...................................................................................................................................260 9.16 Project security ..........................................................................................................................261 9.16.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................261 9.16.2 User view ...................................................................................................................................263 9.16.3 User logon..................................................................................................................................264 9.16.4 User logoff..................................................................................................................................266 9.16.5 Creating users............................................................................................................................266 9.16.6 Changing user data....................................................................................................................268 9.16.7 Deleting users ............................................................................................................................269 9.17 Closing the project .....................................................................................................................269 10 Operating alarms ................................................................................................................................... 271 Overview ....................................................................................................................................271 Recognizing pending alarms......................................................................................................272 Displaying alarms.......................................................................................................................273 Display infotexts for an alarm.....................................................................................................275 Acknowledge alarm....................................................................................................................275 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 13 Table of contents 10.6 Edit alarm .................................................................................................................................. 276 11 Operating recipes .................................................................................................................................. 277 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 277 11.1 Structure of a recipe.................................................................................................................. 277 11.2 Recipes in the project................................................................................................................ 279 11.3 Recipe displays......................................................................................................................... 280 11.4 Recipe values in the HMI device and the PLC.......................................................................... 283 11.5 11.6 Operating the recipe view ......................................................................................................... 284 11.6.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 284 11.6.2 Creating a recipe data record.................................................................................................... 285 11.6.3 Editing a recipe data record ...................................................................................................... 286 11.6.4 Deleting a recipe data record.................................................................................................... 287 11.6.5 Synchronizing tags.................................................................................................................... 288 11.6.6 Reading a recipe data record from the PLC ............................................................................. 289 11.6.7 Transferring a recipe data record to the PLC............................................................................ 290 11.7 Operating the simple recipe view.............................................................................................. 290 11.7.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 290 11.7.2 Creating a recipe data record.................................................................................................... 292 11.7.3 Editing a recipe data record ...................................................................................................... 293 11.7.4 Deleting a recipe data record.................................................................................................... 294 11.7.5 Reading a recipe data record from the PLC ............................................................................. 295 11.7.6 Transferring a recipe data record to the PLC............................................................................ 295 Exporting a recipe data record.................................................................................................. 296 11.8 11.9 Importing a recipe data record .................................................................................................. 297 11.10 Examples................................................................................................................................... 298 11.10.1 Entering a recipe data record.................................................................................................... 298 11.10.2 Manual production sequence.................................................................................................... 299 12 Maintenance and care ........................................................................................................................... 301 Maintenance and care............................................................................................................... 301 12.1 Spare parts and repairs............................................................................................................. 302 12.2 Technical specifications......................................................................................................................... 305 13.1 Dimension drawings.................................................................................................................. 305 13.1.1 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN........................................................................................................ 305 13.1.2 Charging station ........................................................................................................................ 307 13.1.3 Transponder.............................................................................................................................. 308 13.2 Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 308 13.2.1 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN........................................................................................................ 308 13.2.2 Batteries .................................................................................................................................... 311 13.2.3 Charging station ........................................................................................................................ 312 13.2.4 Transponder.............................................................................................................................. 312 13.2.5 Description of interfaces on the HMI device ............................................................................. 313 13.3 Radiation characteristic............................................................................................................. 314 13.3.1 Radiation characteristic of the transponder .............................................................................. 314 13.3.2 Radiation characteristic of HMI device...................................................................................... 316 Appendix................................................................................................................................................ 321 13 B 14 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 C Table of contents B.1 ESD guideline ............................................................................................................................321 B.2 System alarms ...........................................................................................................................323 Abbreviations......................................................................................................................................... 325 C.1 Abbreviations .............................................................................................................................325 Glossary ................................................................................................................................................ 327 Index...................................................................................................................................................... 335 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 15 Overview 1.1 Product overview 1 Expanded possible fields of application with Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN The Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN offers the option of implementing mobile safety functions
(emergency stop and enabling) at any point of a machine or system. An effective range limit has been implemented for the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN. Depending on his or her location, the operator receives a secure, electronically monitored operator control enable. The HMI device communicates with the F-CPU via WLAN. This enables the operator to operate different machines or systems without cables getting in the way. The Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN is characterized by short commissioning times, a large user memory and high performance, and is optimized for projects based on WinCC flexible. The Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN has the following features:
Safety-related operator controls:
Emergency stop button Enabling button Effective range concept Wireless operation with IWLAN interface via PROFINET Battery operation 7.5" TFT screen with 64k colors 18 function keys with LED Extended HMI functions Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 17 Overview 1.2 Design of the HMI device 1.2 Design of the HMI device 1.2.1 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Introduction The Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN is available in two design variations:
With enabling button and emergency stop button With enabling button, emergency stop button, handwheel, key-operated switch and two illuminated pushbuttons Note The Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN is intended to be battery-operated. Front view The following figure shows the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN. This can vary, depending on the delivery status of the HMI device. Emergency stop button LEDs Display with touch screen ON/OFF button Covers for the labeling strip guides Key-operated switch, optional 18 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Side view Rear view Overview 1.2 Design of the HMI device Illuminated pushbutton, optional Membrane keyboard Handwheel, optional
Fall protection for the emergency stop button Enabling buttons, positioned on both sides of the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Handle On the reverse side you will find the type plate and approvals.
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 19 Overview 1.2 Design of the HMI device Handle Connection bay cover Connection for tabletop power supply unit Battery compartment cover Charging contacts for charging station USB connector The Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN can be securely hooked into a charging station. 1.2.2 Supplementary pack and other accessories Accessory kit The accessory kit is supplied with the HMI device. The accessories pack for the HMI device contains the following:
Main battery Bridging battery Cover cap with rubber seal Screws for fixing the cover cap Label for cover cap Function manual "Fail-safe operation of the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN", in German CD The CD includes:
Function manual "Fail-safe operation of the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN", in German, English and Japanese F-FBs for the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Additional documents may be enclosed with the accessory kit. Protective foil Labeling strips A protective foil kit for the HMI device can be ordered. Use order number 6AV6 671-5BC00-
0AX0. The protective foil prevents the touch screen from being scratched or soiled. Labeling strips can be ordered as accessories. Use order number 6AV6 671-5BF00-0AX0. Stickers for the cover caps can also be supplied, in addition to the labeling strips. The cover caps cover the slot openings for the labeling strips. 20 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Memory card Overview 1.2 Design of the HMI device Note Multimedia card The multimedia card of the SIMATIC S7 PLC cannot be used. Only use the SD memory cards or multimedia cards tested and approved by Siemens. SIMATIC PC USB FlashDrive The SIMATIC PC USB FlashDrive is a mobile form of data storage with a high data throughput, designed for industrial use. Main battery Bridging battery Charging station The HMI device is designed to be operated by a battery. The main battery can be ordered with the order number 6AV6 671-5CL00-0AX0. The bridging battery allows you to change the main battery during operation. The charging station is used to charge the battery in the HMI device and to safely store the HMI device. You can also charge a main battery in each of the two charging compartments. The charging station is designed to be used in the system. The charging station can be ordered with the order number 6AV6 671-5CE00-0AX0. Tabletop power supply unit The tabletop power supply unit is only suitable for an office environment. You can operate the HMI device with a tabletop power supply unit. The tabletop power supply unit, including main supply conductors (EU, US, UK, Japan), can be ordered with the order number 6AV6 671-5CN00-0AX1. Transponder One or more transponders form zones in the system. The transponder can be ordered with the order number 6AV6 671-5CM00-0AX0. You can find more information about this on the Internet at:http://mall.automation.siemens.com Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 21 Overview 1.2 Design of the HMI device 1.2.3 Battery Purpose The HMI device is supplied with a main battery and a bridging battery. Main battery and bridging battery When fully charged, the main battery guarantees approximately 4 hours' operation time in normal operation. After this time, the battery must be either changed or recharged. You can change the main battery while the HMI device is operating. The bridging battery supplies the power while the main battery is being changed. While the power is being drawn from the bridging battery, the following features are deactivated:
Display backlighting Membrane keyboard Touch screen Function key LEDs Illuminated pushbuttons USB interface Charging options To charge the main battery, you have the following possibilities:
In the HMI device while it is in the charging station In the charging compartment of the charging station In the HMI device when connected to the tabletop power supply unit See also Inserting, charging and changing the battery (Page 83) Charging batteries in the charging compartment (Page 120) 1.2.4 Charging station The following figure shows the charging station. 22 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01
Overview 1.2 Design of the HMI device
Lock Hook for hooking in the HMI device Charging compartment for one main battery each Charging contacts for the HMI device LED display Power supply connection Functions Accessory kit The charging station performs the following functions:
Charging the batteries in the charging compartments of the charging station Supplying power to the HMI device Charging the main battery fitted in the HMI device Safe storage of the HMI device The lock prevents unauthorized removal of the HMI device from the charging station. The accessory kit is supplied with the charging station. The accessory kit for the HMI device contains the following:
Lock Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 23 Overview 1.3 Configuration and process control phase Key set for lock Counterpart for power supply connector Additional documents may be enclosed with the accessory kit. See also Charging station (Page 120) 1.3 Configuration and process control phase Introduction You must follow the phases below in order to use an HMI device in the system:
Configuration phase Process control phase Configuration phase The HMI device project, which includes the plant screens, is created during the configuration phase. The following actions are carried out as part of the configuration phase:
Creating the project Accepting the project (determining the checksum) Testing the project Simulating the project Backing up the project After the configuration phase, the project is transferred to the HMI device by the configuring PC.
Process control phase Once the project is transferred to the HMI device, the operator operates and monitors current processes in the process control phase. The HMI device is connected to a PLC in the plant and exchanges values with this PLC. The plant screens on the HMI devices are used to provide a clear overview of the active processes. 24 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Overview 1.4 Transponder The following figure shows an example of a system structure with the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN.
In the depicted configuration, each PROFINET IO device communicates with just one PROFINET IO controller. In this example, the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN communicates exclusively with the F-CPU as the F-PROFINET IO controller. See also Operating a project (Page 231) Preparing and backing up a project (Page 189) 1.4 Transponder Forming effective ranges and zones with transponders Transponders form effective ranges and zones. Effective ranges and zones are defined by the maximum distance from one or more transponders. Effective ranges You can define effective ranges in your system. An effective range is the range in which sections of the system, for example a machine, can be operated with the enabling buttons of the HMI device. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 25 Overview 1.4 Transponder Zones You can divide your system into zones. A zone is a physical range for operator control and monitoring which is registered by the HMI device. Depending on the project design, the HMI device displays zone-specific process displays and allows image objects to be operated in a zone-dependent manner. Determining the current effective range and current zone The assignment of transponders to effective ranges and zones is predefined in the project. Each transponder has a unique ID. The transmitting range of the transponder approximates to a lobe shape with a range of approximately 8 m. Distances are measured as follows:
The HMI device sends signals in the current project The transponder responds to the signal from the HMI device and sends its ID to the HMI device The HMI device evaluates the ID and only measures the distance between it and the configured transponder(s) Thus the HMI device determines which effective range/zone it is currently in. Installation and connection You must install the transponders in the system such that the effective ranges and zones are covered by the transmitting ranges of the relevant transponders. The transponders are battery-operated. System without effective ranges and zones You can also operate the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN in a system without effective ranges and zones. In this case, no transponders are required in the system. Accessory kit See also 26 The accessories pack is supplied with the transponder. The accessories pack for the transponder contains the following:
3 AA mignon batteries, 1.5 V Additional documents may be enclosed with the accessory kit. Distance measurement between HMI device and transponder (Page 61) Setting transponder ID and inserting the battery (Page 66) Effective ranges and zones (Page 58) Radiation characteristic of the transponder (Page 314) Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 1.5 Ranges in the plant WLAN range Overview 1.5 Ranges in the plant The WLAN range is the range in the plant where the HMI device communicates with other communication nodes over a wireless local area network.
Access point is the network transition from WLAN to LAN WLAN range in which communication with the access point is possible Mobile panel in the WLAN range; the emergency stop button is active, the enabling buttons are without function. When the PROFIsafe communication between the controller and operator panel is established in the WLAN range, the emergency stop button on the HMI device becomes active. Effective range An effective range is the range in which sections of the system, for example a machine, can be operated with the enabling buttons of the HMI device. A requirement for fail-safe operation is that the HMI device is logged onto an effective range within the WLAN range. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 27 Overview 1.6 Fail-safe operation Zones In addition to the effective ranges you can define zones in your system. The zones are not relevant for fail-safe operation. They are used merely to control the project depending on the location of the operator. For example a picture change can be configured for zone entry or zone exit. Zones and effective range are independent of each other. See also Division of the system into effective ranges and zones (Page 58) 1.6 Fail-safe operation Configuration tools and add-on packages For fail-safe operation of the HMI device, the following software is required:
STEP 7 V5.4 as of SP2 SIMATIC S7 Distributed Safety as of V5.4 SP3 WinCC flexible 2007 Fail-safe automation system Fail-safe automation system (F systems) are used in plants requiring higher levels of safety. F systems control processes in such a way that a safe state is achieved in every situation. An immediate shutdown therefore does not pose a danger to people or the environment. Fail-safe application of the HMI device The Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN is a PROFINET IO device on Industrial Ethernet. During fail-safe operation, the HMI device registers the signal states of the emergency stop button and enabling button, and transmits corresponding safety message frames to the CPU. The CPU and HMI device communicate with each other via the PROFIsafe fail-safe protocol. The HMI device can operate in fail-safe mode conforming to SIL3/Ple/Cat. 4 if the safety functions are appropriately configured in STEP 7 with the "S7 Distributed Safety" option package. To guarantee availability of the safety functions, particular fail-safe function blocks (F-FBs) must be used in the safety program. The F-FBs are supplied on a CD together with the HMI device. Diagnostics function of the HMI device HMI device diagnostics conforming to PROFINET IO standard IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/3 are available for the standard application. 28 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Overview 1.7 Functional scope with WinCC flexible The diagnostics function cannot be parameterized. The diagnostics are always activated and are automatically made available by the HMI device in STEP 7 in the event of an error. In addition to the safety-relevant part, the diagnostics function transfers the following diagnostics:
Communication error Communication between the HMI device as I/O device and the F-CPU as I/O controller has been interrupted (for example, due to incorrect PROFIsafe address or missing WLAN connection). 1.7 Functional scope with WinCC flexible The following tables show the objects that can be integrated into a project for a Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN. Note The specified values are maximum values of the individual objects. Simultaneous use of multiple objects with their maximum value can lead to problems in the active project. Alarms Object Alarm ALARM_S Alarm buffer retentive Tags, values and lists Specification Number of discrete alarms Number of analog alarms Length of the alarm text Number of tags in an alarm LEDs Acknowledge error alarms individually Acknowledge several error alarms simultaneously
(group acknowledgment of alarm groups) Edit alarm Alarm indicator Display S7 alarms Alarm buffer capacity Simultaneously queued alarm events View alarm Delete alarm buffer Line-by-line printing of alarms Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN 4.000 200 80 characters Max. 8 Alarm line, Alarm window, Alarm view Yes 16 alarm groups Yes Yes Yes 512 alarms Max. 250 Yes Yes Yes Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 29 Overview 1.7 Functional scope with WinCC flexible Object Tag Limit value monitoring Linear scaling Text list Graphics list Specification Number Input/Output Input/Output Number Number 1) The maximum total of text and graphics lists is 500. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN 2.048 Yes Yes 500 1) 400 1) Screens Object Screen Recipes Object Recipe Specification Number Fields per screen Tags per screen Complex objects per screen (for example bars) Template Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN 500 200 200 10 Yes Specification Number Data records per recipe Entries per recipe Recipe memory Location1) Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN 300 500 1.000 64 KB Memory card USB memory stick Network drive The number of recipe data records might be restricted by the capacity of the storage medium. Note The HMI devices are suitable for the logging of relatively small volumes of data. Manage the data in several adjacent archives in a segmented circular log. The use of a large circular log has a negative effect on performance. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 1) Logs 30 Overview 1.7 Functional scope with WinCC flexible Specification Number of logs Number of sub-archives with segmented circular log Entries in each log including all partial logs Filing format Location1) Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN 20 400 10.000 CSV with ANSI character set Memory card USB memory stick Network drive The number of entries in the log may be restricted by the capacity of the storage medium. Object Logs 1) Safety Object User administration Infotexts Object Infotext Specification Number of user groups Number of users Number of authorizations Specification Length (no. of characters) Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN 50 50 32 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN 320
(depending on font) For alarms For screens For screen objects (for example for I/O field, switch, button, invisible button) Yes Yes Yes Additional functions Object Monitor setting Language change VBScript Graphic object Trends Task planner Text objects Direct keys Specification Touch screen calibration Brightness setting Number of languages User-specific extension of the functionality Number of scripts Vector and pixel graphics Number Number of tasks Number PROFINET IO direct keys Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Yes Yes 16 Yes 50 Yes 300 48 10.000 Yes Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 31 Overview 1.8 Software options Device-specific functions Object Battery WLAN quality Effective range quality Effective range name Zone quality Zone name Specification Displaying battery status Displaying WLAN quality Displaying the effective range quality Display effective range name Displaying zone quality Displaying zone names Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1.8 Software options The following software options are available for the HMI device:
WinCC flexible/Sm@rtService The Sm@rtService option enables you to access a remote HMI device from the HMI device or PC via Ethernet. Access to the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN is read-only. WinCC flexible/Sm@rtAccess The Sm@rtAccess option enables you to set up communication between different HMI systems. WinCC flexible /Audit The /Audit option extends the HMI device to include functions for recording operations in an audit trail and electronic signature. 1.9 Communication Number of connections Connection Maximum number of connections Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN 6 Note In the following cases, you must not enable PROFINET IO in the Control Panel:
Use of PLCs from other manufacturers PLCs that can be used for the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN The HMI device has been enabled for use with the following type of PLC:
32 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 SIMATIC S7 Allen-Bradley E/IP C.Logix Note Overview 1.9 Communication A SIMATIC S7F is vital for fail-safe functionality. The HMI device cannot be operated without fail-safe communication. Protocols The HMI device uses the following protocol for communication with the PLC:
PROFIsafe Mode V2.0 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 33 Safety instructions, standards and notes 2.1 Safety instructions Safety regulations 2 WARNING Injury or material damage Strictly observe all instructions in this document at all times. Otherwise, hazardous situations can arise or the safety functions integrated in the HMI device can be rendered ineffective. Observe the safety and accident prevention instructions applicable to your application in addition to the safety instructions given in this manual. Configuration requirements WARNING Injury or material damage The configuration engineer for a machine or system PLC must take precautions to ensure that an interrupted program can be restarted normally after communication errors, voltage dips, or power failures. Dangerous operating modes must not occur, not even temporarily, from the entire sequence of the user program up to troubleshooting. Proper use WARNING Commissioning of the HMI device is forbidden until it has been absolutely ensured that the machine which is to be operated with the HMI device complies with Directive 98/37/EC. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 35 Safety instructions, standards and notes 2.1 Safety instructions Fault-free operation WARNING Interference with other systems When using the HMI device in accordance with DIN EN 13557 you must ensure that the HMI device does not interfere with other systems at the site, or that other systems do not interface with the HMI device. Safety measures during operation NOTICE Non-functional emergency stop button The emergency stop button must be checked periodically for proper function. WARNING HMI device failure After a hard impact to the HMI device, check the safety-relevant features for functional capability, for example in the event that the HMI device is dropped. WARNING Danger of injury Manual movements controlled with the HMI should only be executed in conjunction with the enabling buttons and at reduced velocity. WARNING Exclusive operating right When operating the plant with the HMI device it is not permitted to operate the plant concurrently from a different HMI device. Prevent concurrent operation through appropriate configuration. High frequency radiation NOTICE Unintentional operating situations High-frequency radiation, for example from cellular phones, can lead to undesirable operating situations. 36 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Safety instructions, standards and notes 2.2 Standards, certificates and approvals 2.2 Standards, certificates and approvals Certifications CAUTION The following overview shows possible approvals. The respective valid approvals for the HMI device itself, the charging station, power supply unit and transponder are those shown on the rear panel. CE approval The HMI device, charging station, power supply unit, and transponder satisfy the requirements and protection objectives of the EC Directives below. The HMI device, charging station, power supply unit, and transponder comply with the harmonized European standards (EN) published in the Official Journals of the European Union for programmable controllers:
89/336/EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (EMC Directive) 98/37/EG Directive of the European Parliament and Council of 22 June 1998 on the approximation of the laws and administrative regulations of the Member States concerning machinery Specific absorption rate in accordance with EN 50932 EC Declaration of Conformity The EC Declarations of Conformity are available to the relevant authorities at the following address:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Automation & Drives A&D AS RD ST PLC PO Box 1963 D-92209 Amberg, Germany UL approval Underwriters Laboratories Inc., to UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment) CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment) Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 37 Safety instructions, standards and notes 2.2 Standards, certificates and approvals The approval is only valid in the case of battery operation or when stationary in the charging station. Marking for Australia N117 The HMI device, charging station, power supply unit, and transponder satisfy the requirements of Standard AS/NZS 2064 (Class A). Wireless approval The HMI device wireless approvals for the various countries are located as follows:
On the rear of the HMI device In the product information supplied together with the HMI device BGIA TV 38 The BGIA confirms that the HMI device satisfies the requirements of the standards below with regard to its safety functions. SIL3 in accordance with IEC 61508-1 to 4 Category 4 in accordance with EN 954-1. Pl e and Cat. 4 in accordance with EN ISO 13849-1 ISO 13850 Principle for testing and certifying "Bus systems for the transmission of safety-related information", GS-ET-26 Electrical Engineering Technical Committee, Edition 05.2002 Principles for testing and certifying electromechanical enabling switches and devices, GS-ET-22 Electrical Engineering Technical Committee, Edition 11.2005 The TV confirms that the HMI device satisfies the requirements of the standards below with regard to its safety functions. SIL3 in accordance with IEC 61508-1 to 4 Category 4 in accordance with EN 954-1. Pl e and Cat. 4 in accordance with EN ISO 13849-1 EN 60204-1 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Safety instructions, standards and notes 2.3 Operating safety ISO 13850 IEC 62061 98/37/EC Requesting certificates Copies of the certificates and associated reports can be requested from the following address:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Automation & Drives A&D AS RD ST PO Box 1963 D-92209 Amberg, Germany 2.3 Operating safety Standards The HMI device complies with the following standards:
EN 954-1 Safety of machinery EN 60204-1 Safety of machinery Electrical equipment of machines EN 62061 Safety of machinery Functional safety of safety-related electrical, electronic and programmable electronic control systems EN ISO 13849-1 Development, testing and certification of safety-related machine controls ISO 13850 Safety of machinery Emergency stop Principles for design IEC 61508 Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic-related systems EN 61131-1 and EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers The HMI device was tested for EMC in accordance with the following standards:
EN 61000-6-4, Generic standard emitted interference EN 61000-6-2, Generic standard, Immunity, industrial environments EN 61131-2, Programmable Controllers Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 39 Safety instructions, standards and notes 2.4 Power supply EN 300 328 V1.6.1, EN 300 440-1 V1.3.1, EN 301 893, EN 301 489-1, EN 301 489-17, FCC Part 15.245, 15.247, 15.407 Wireless approval EN 50 360, IEEE 1528-X, EN 50371, EN 50 392 Radiation protection requirements (SAR/EMF) If the HMI device is used in a system, the following standards are fulfilled:
prEN 1921, Industrial automation systems safety of integrated manufacturing systems EN 12417:2001, Machine tools safety machining centers UL 508, Industrial Control Equipment CSA C22.2 No.14, Industrial Control Equipment 2.4 Power supply Safety specifications 40 CAUTION Damage to the HMI device Only operate the HMI device with approved components:
Batteries Charging station Tabletop power supply unit http://mall.automation.siemens.com WARNING Injury or material damage The HMI device should only be operated in the plant with the battery or in the charging station. Operation with the tabletop power supply is not permitted in the plant. WARNING Effectiveness of the emergency stop button The emergency stop button only becomes active when the HMI device is integrated into the safety program. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Charging station Safety instructions, standards and notes 2.4 Power supply WARNING Injury or material damage The charging station complies with the following standards:
EN 50335-2-29 DIN EN 60204-1 Protection class III in accordance with EN 61131-2 or EN 50178. The 24 VDC power supply must be ensured by safely isolating the low voltage from hazardous voltages, for example by using a safety transformer or equivalent equipment. Protect the power supply circuit with a 7 A fuse. Allowance should be made for the loss of voltage on the connection cable during dimensional analysis of the supply!
Please refer to the technical data for the supply voltage requirements. WARNING Injury or material damage Configure the 24 VDC supply for the charging station correctly, otherwise components of your automation system can be damaged and persons may be injured. Use only voltage generated as protective extra-low voltage (PELV) for the 24 VDC supply of the charging station. CAUTION Safe electrical separation Use only power supply units with safety isolation complying with IEC 60364-4-41 or HD 384.04.41 (VDE 0100, Part 410), for example according to the PELV standard, for the charging station's 24 VDC supply. The supply voltage must be within the specified voltage range. Malfunctions in the charging station may otherwise result. Applies to non-isolated system design:
Connect the connection for GND 24 V from the 24 V power supply output to equipotential bonding for uniform reference potential. Tabletop power supply unit CAUTION Please note that the mains connector must be removed for a complete disconnection from the mains. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 41 Safety instructions, standards and notes 2.5 Notes about usage Do not operate the HMI device in the plant with the table power supply unit. The tabletop power supply unit is only suitable for an office environment. The device is designed for operation on grounded power supply networks (TN systems to VDE 0100, Part 300, or IEC 364-3). Operation is not authorized on ungrounded or impedance-grounded power networks (IT networks). 2.5 Notes about usage Using the HMI device A list indicating in which country or in which geographical region of a country the HMI device can be used is included in the product information supplied with the HMI device. Use in industry Residential use The HMI device is designed for industrial use. For this reason, the following standards are met:
Interference emission requirements, paragraph 7.3, DIN EN 60947-1, Environment A Interference immunity requirements DIN EN 61326 If the HMI device is used in a residential area, you must take measures to achieve Limit Class B conforming to EN 55011 for RF interference. A suitable measure for achieving the required RF interference level for Limit Class B includes for example:
Use of filters in electrical supply lines Individual acceptance is required. Use of cable-free control equipment WARNING When using cable-free control equipment you must ensure that it does not interfere with other systems at the site, or that other systems do not interfere with it. 42 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 2.6 Risk analysis Carrying out a risk analysis Safety instructions, standards and notes 2.6 Risk analysis The following standards must be used to perform the risk analysis:
EN ISO 12100-1 and EN ISO 12100-2, General design guidelines for machines EN 1050 Risk Assessment for Machinery EN 954-1 Safety of Machinery These considerations result in a safety category (B, 1, 2, 3, 4) in accordance with EN 954-1 that ultimately dictates how the safety-related aspects of the system that will be configured must be furnished. With the safety-related parts of the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN the following requirements are satisfied:
Category 4 in accordance with EN 954-1. SIL 3 in accordance with IEC 61508 Pl e and Cat. 4 in accordance with EN ISO 13849-1 The risk assessment must take into account that the overall concept of the plant must be configured accordingly. More detailed instructions on risk assessment and risk reduction are provided in the system manual "Safety Integrated". See also Safety-related operator controls (Page 100) 2.7 Safety functions of the emergency stop button Safety instructions There is an emergency stop button on the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN. The emergency button on the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN brings about a safety-related stop of the configured system in accordance with EN 60204-1:1997, Section 9.2.5.3. You have the option of implementing a Category 0, 1, or 2 Stop function in accordance with EN 60204-
1: 1997, Section 9.2.2. The stop function category must be selected on the basis of a risk assessment. WARNING Emergency stop button not available The emergency stop button on the HMI device must not used as a replacement for a permanently-wired emergency stop/emergency off on the machine. Install stationary emergency stop buttons that are available at all times on the configured system. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 43 Safety instructions, standards and notes 2.8 Enabling button WARNING Effectiveness of the emergency stop button The following requirements must be met in order to render the emergency stop button effective:
The HMI device must be operated in the charging station or operated with the battery. The project must be running on the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN. The HMI device must be integrated in the safety program of the F-CPU. If these prerequisites are satisfied the following applies:
The "SAFE" LED on the HMI device is illuminated. The emergency stop button of the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN is effective. Category 0 or 1 Stop If a Category 0 or 1 Stop circuit is implemented, the stop function must be in effect regardless of the operating mode. A Category 0 Stop must have precedence. Release of the emergency stop button should not cause a hazardous situation (see also EN 60204:1997 chapter 9.2.5.3). The stop function is not to be used as a replacement for safety equipment. Storing the HMI device WARNING Non-functional emergency stop button If the HMI device is not integrated, the emergency stop button does not function. To avoid confusion between effective and non-effective emergency stop buttons, only one integrated HMI device should be freely accessible. If the HMI device is not in use, it must be stored in a locked area. See also Emergency stop button (Page 100) 2.8 Enabling button Introduction The enabling device consists of the two enabling buttons mounted on both sides of the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN. Numerically controlled machines and systems are equipped with the operating modes
"Automatic mode" and "Special mode". 44 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Safety instructions, standards and notes 2.8 Enabling button Safety is ensured in automatic mode by means of closed, isolating protective devices and/or with functional non-isolating protective devices that block access. In special mode, safety has to be ensured in a different manner than in automatic mode. In special mode, the danger zones of the machine or system are entered, where controlled movements have to be possible. Special mode A reduced speed on the machine or in the system has to be specified for special mode based on the risk assessment. Movement of the machine should only be possible when the enabling device is activated. The operator must have the necessary qualifications and be acquainted with the details of the intended application. Safety instructions The safety-related aspects of the velocity reduction control and those for the enabling device are designed in such a way that they satisfy the EN 954-1 safety category determined by the risk analysis. The operating principles of enabling devices are described in EN 60204. Through the findings from accident investigations and the existence of technical solutions, the 3-stage enabling button became state of the art. Positions 1 and 3 of the enabling button are Off functions. Only the middle position allows the enabling function. EN 60204-1:1997 is identical to IEC 60204-1, whereby the 3-stage enabling button is gaining international importance. The Stop category of the enabling device must be selected on the basis of a risk assessment and correspond to a Category 0 or 1 Stop. WARNING Injury or material damage Enabling buttons should only be used when the following applies for the person activating the enabling button:
The person can see the danger zone. The person is capable of recognizing personal injury hazards in good time. The person is capable of taking immediate measures to avoid danger. The only person allowed to remain in the danger zone is the person who is activating the enabling button. Commands for unsafe conditions are not permitted to be issued with one enabling button alone. For this purpose, a secondary, intentional start command by means of a button on the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN is required. If you leave the effective range only briefly for a time period of up to 30 seconds while the enabling button is pressed, the following occurs: 5 seconds after the effective range is left, the enabling function is revoked. If you enter the effective range again within 30 seconds, the enabling button must be released and pressed again in order to reactivate enabling. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 45 Safety instructions, standards and notes 2.9 Electromagnetic compatibility Note Enabling button not effective The enabling button is only effective if the HMI device is logged onto the effective range and the "RNG" LED on the HMI device lights up. If the operator leaves the effective range, the enabling button is deactivated after 5 seconds. After 30 seconds the "Effective range exited without logoff" dialog box opens. The LED "RNG" only goes out when the operator has confirmed this dialog box. Risk from improper use To avoid the danger of unauthorized use of the enabling button due to impermissible hold-
down, on each project start the enabling button must be pressed all the way down, and then released. 2.9 Electromagnetic compatibility Introduction The HMI device, the charging station, the transponder, and the power supply satisfy, among other things, the requirements of the EMC laws pertaining to the European domestic market. The enhanced testing and limit value levels defined by CDV 61326-3-1/Ed. 1 have been taken into account during the type test EMC-compliant installation Conditions for fault-free operation include EMC-compatible assembly of the charging station and the use of interference-proof cables. The "Directives for interference-proof installation of PLCs" and the "SIMATIC NET, Fundamentals of Industrial WLAN" manual also apply to the assembly of the charging station. Pulse-shaped interference 46 The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of modules with regard to pulse-
shaped interference. Pulse-shaped interference Electrostatic discharge in accordance with IEC 61000-4-2 Bursts
(high-speed transient interference) in accordance with IEC 61000-4-4 Checked with Applies to charging station with or without plugged-
on HMI device and power supply unit (230 VAC) Air discharge: 8 kV Contact discharge: 6 kV 2 kV supply line Degree of severity 3 3 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Safety instructions, standards and notes 2.9 Electromagnetic compatibility Pulse-shaped interference Checked with Applies to charging station with or without plugged-
on HMI device and power supply unit (230 VAC) Degree of severity High-power surge pulses in accordance with IEC 61000-4-5, external protective circuit required (refer to S7-300 PLC, Installation, chapter Lightning and overvoltage protection) Asymmetrical 3 2 kV power cable DC voltage with protective elements coupling Symmetrical coupling 1 kV power cable DC voltage with protective elements 3 Sinusoidal interference The following table shows the EMC behavior of the modules with respect to sinusoidal interference. Sinusoidal interference HF radiation (in electromagnetic fields) in accordance with IEC 61000-4-3 HF conductance on cables and cable shields in accordance with IEC 61000-4-6 Test values Applies to HMI device, charging station, and power supply unit:
80% amplitude modulation at 1 kHz To 10 V/m in the range 80 MHz to 1 GHz To 10 V/m in the range 1.4 GHz to 2 GHz To 1 V/m in the range 2 GHz to 2.7 GHz Test voltage 10 V, with 80% amplitude modulation of 1 kHz in the range 9 kHz to 80 MHz Degree of severity 3 3 Emission of radio interference The following table shows the unwanted emissions from electromagnetic fields in accordance with EN 55011, Limit Value Class A, Group 1, measured at a distance of 10 m.
< 40 dB (V/m) quasi-peak
< 47 dB (V/m) quasi-peak 30 MHz to 230 MHz 230 MHz to 1000 MHz Additional measures Before you connect the HMI device to the public network, ensure that it is compliant with Limit Class B in accordance with EN 55022. Specific absorption rate SAR Recommendation 1999/519/EC; Exposure of the public to EMF Limit values for Europe in accordance with EN 50932 Limit values for USA in accordance with FCC OET Bulletin 65 Supplement C Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 47 Safety instructions, standards and notes 2.10 Transport and storage conditions 2.0 W/kg within 10 g of tissue (in accordance with ICNIRP guideline) 1.6 W/kg within 1 g of tissue (in accordance with IEEE/FCC) 2.10 Transport and storage conditions Mechanical and climatic transport conditions The shipping conditions of this HMI device exceed requirements in accordance with IEC 61131-2. The following specifications apply to devices that are shipped and stored in the original packaging. The climatic conditions comply with the following standard:
IEC 60721-3-2, Class 2K4 for transport The mechanical conditions are compliant with IEC 60721-3-2, Class 2M2. The following table shows the transport and storage conditions for the HMI device, charging station, tabletop power supply unit and transponder. Type of condition Drop test (in transport package) Temperature Atmospheric pressure Relative humidity Sinusoidal vibration in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6 Shock in accordance with IEC 60068-2-29 Permitted range 1 m From 20 to +60 C From 1,080 hPa to 660 hPa, corresponds to an elevation 1,000 to 3.500 m Applies to HMI device:
From 10% to 90%, without condensation Applies to charging station and transponder from 35% to 85%, without condensation 5 Hz to 9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 Hz to 500 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 250 m/s2, 6 ms, 1,000 shocks NOTICE Device failure In the following cases, ensure that no moisture (dew) can settle on or in the HMI device, charging station or transponder:
Transportation of the HMI device in low temperatures Under extreme temperature variations The HMI device must have acquired room temperature before it is put into operation. Do not expose the HMI device to direct radiation from a heater in order to warm it up. If dewing has developed, wait approximately four hours until the HMI device has dried completely before switching it on. The following points must be adhered to in order to ensure a fault-free and safe operation of the HMI device:
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 48 Safety instructions, standards and notes 2.10 Transport and storage conditions Proper transportation and storage Proper installation and mounting Careful operation and maintenance The warranty for the HMI device will be deemed void if these stipulations are not heeded. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 49 Planning application 3.1 Application and ambient conditions Mechanical and climatic conditions of use 3 The HMI device is designed for use in a location protected from the effects of the weather. The conditions of use are compliant with requirements to DIN IEC 60721-3-3:
Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements) The table applies to the HMI device, charging station and transponder. Tested for Sinusoidal vibration, stationary Test standard DIN IEC 60721-3-3 DIN IEC 60721-3-3 Shocks, non-
stationary, Total shock response spectrum Class 3K3 (climatic requirements) Comments Frequency range:
2 f 200 Hz Deflection:
1.5 mm/5 m/s2 Shock amplitude: 70 g shock duration: 22 ms The table applies to the HMI device, charging station and transponder. Ambient conditions Air temperature Relative humidity Permitted range 5 to 40 C 5 to 85 %, no condensation Absolute humidity Atmospheric pressure 1 to 25 g/m3 70 to 106 kPa Comments Corresponds to relative humidity, load degree 2 in accordance with IEC 61131, part 2 Corresponds to an elevation of up to 3,000 m Use with additional measures In the following cases the use of the HMI device requires additional measures:
In locations with a high degree of ionizing radiation In locations with difficult operating conditions, for example due to:
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 51 Planning application 3.1 Application and ambient conditions Corrosive vapors, gases, oils or chemicals Electrical or magnetic fields of high intensity In systems that require special monitoring, for example:
Elevators Systems in especially hazardous rooms Testing for mechanical environmental conditions in accordance with GS-ET-22 The following table provides information on the type and scope of tests for mechanical ambient conditions. The table applies to the HMI device, charging station and transponder. Tested for Vibrations Test standard IEC 60068, part 26
(sinusoidal) Test principles GS-ET-22 Shock IEC 60068, Part 227 Continuous shocks IEC 60068, Part 229 Impact IEC 60068, Part 275 Comments Type of vibration:
20 frequency cycles with a tuning rate of 1 octave/minute. Frequency range in accordance with GS-ET-22:
10 f 150 Hz, 1 Hz Deflection:
0.35 mm / 5 g 15 % at the control point Shock form: Half-sinus Shock amplitude: 30 g Shock duration: 11 ms Number of shocks: 3 per axis Shock form: Half-sinus Shock amplitude: 10 g Shock duration: 16 ms Shock cycle: (13)/s Number of shocks: 1000 10 One-time impact stress of 1 Nm with an impact test device similar to DIN VDE 0740, Part 1, Section 19.2 at room temperature. The table only applies to the HMI device, with and without battery. Tested for Falling Test standard Drop testing in accordance with EN 60068-2-32 Comments 1.2 m Reducing vibrations If the HMI device is subjected to greater shocks or vibrations, you must take appropriate measures to reduce acceleration or amplitudes. We recommend fitting the charging station of the HMI device to vibration-absorbent material
(on metal shock absorbers, for example). 52 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Planning application 3.1 Application and ambient conditions Climatic ambient conditions for the HMI device The following table shows the permitted climatic ambient conditions for use of the HMI device:
Ambient conditions Temperature Operation Storage/transport Relative humidity Permitted range 0 to 40 C 20 to 60 C 5 to 85 %, no condensation Atmospheric pressure 1.060 hPa to 700 hPa Pollutant concentration SO2: < 0.5 vpm;
Relative humidity < 60 %, no condensation H2S: < 0.1 vpm;
Relative humidity < 60 %, no condensation Comments Corresponds to relative humidity, load degree 2 in accordance with IEC 61131, part 2 Corresponds to an elevation of 1,000 to 2,000 m Check: 10 cm3/m3; 10 days Check: 1 cm3/m3; 10 days Climatic ambient conditions for the charging station The following table shows the permitted climatic ambient conditions for use of the charging station. Ambient conditions Temperature Operation Storage/transport Relative humidity Permitted range From 0 to 40 C From 20 to 60 C 5 to 85 %, no condensation Atmospheric pressure 1.060 hPa to 700 hPa Pollutant concentration SO2: < 0.5 vpm;
Relative humidity < 60 %, no condensation H2S: < 0.1 vpm;
Relative humidity < 60 %, no condensation Comments Corresponds to relative humidity, load degree 2 in accordance with IEC 61131, part 2 Corresponds to an elevation of 1,000 to 2,000 m Check: 10 cm3/m3; 10 days Check: 1 cm3/m3; 10 days Ambient climatic conditions for the transponder The following table shows the permitted climatic ambient conditions for use of the transponder:
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 53 Planning application 3.2 Mounting location and clearance of charging station Ambient conditions Temperature Operation Storage/transport Relative humidity Permitted range 0 to 50 C 20 to 60 C 5 to 85 %, no condensation Atmospheric pressure 1.060 hPa to 700 hPa Pollutant concentration SO2: < 0.5 vpm;
Relative humidity < 60 %, no condensation H2S: < 0.1 vpm;
Relative humidity < 60 %, no condensation Comments Corresponds to relative humidity, load degree 2 in accordance with IEC 61131, part 2 Corresponds to an elevation of 1,000 to 2,000 m Check: 10 cm3/m3; 10 days Check: 1 cm3/m3; 10 days 3.2 Mounting location and clearance of charging station Selecting a mounting location for the charging station 54 The charging station is designed for vertical installation. WARNING Emergency stop button not effective If the HMI device is not integrated, the emergency stop button does not function. The charging station must be installed in either a system area with sufficiently wide WLAN coverage or a separate service area. If the charging station is in the system and the HMI device is hooked into the charging station, the emergency stop button must be effective. To avoid confusion between effective and non-effective emergency stop buttons, only one integrated HMI device should be freely accessible. CAUTION System or machine stop The HMI device can fall down if it is not securely hooked in. The emergency stop button on the HMI device can also be triggered unintentionally. In order to ensure that the HMI device can be hooked in securely, select a vertical surface or one inclined slightly to the rear as the mounting surface. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Planning application 3.2 Mounting location and clearance of charging station NOTICE Battery cannot be charged To charge the batteries, the ambient temperature/battery temperature must not exceed 40 C. The higher the temperature, the longer it will take for the battery to charge. Find a place with a cool ambient temperature for the charging station. If necessary, allow the battery to cool first. Note Positioning Observe the following points when selecting the mounting location:
Do not mount the charging station directly below an Access Point. The display must not be exposed to direct sunlight Ergonomic mounting height The position must satisfy the following conditions:
Ergonomic operation of the HMI device while it is in the charging station Ease of insertion of the HMI device into the charging station and removal from the charging station Maintaining clearances The following clearance is required around the charging station:
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 55 Planning application 3.3 Information on insulation tests, protection class and degree of protection
3.3
Information on insulation tests, protection class and degree of protection Test voltages 56 Insulation strength is demonstrated in the type test with the following test voltages in accordance with IEC 61131-2:
Circuits with a nominal voltage of Ue to other circuits or ground
< 50 V Test voltage 500 VDC Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Protection against foreign objects and water Planning application 3.4 Rated voltages Note The HMI device only complies with the quoted safety classes if the plugs in the cable entries have sealing caps. Degree of protection in accordance with IEC 60529 Front panel and rear panel Description IP65 HMI device:
For the charging station and transponder:
IP65 3.4 Rated voltages The following table shows the permissible rated voltage and the relevant tolerance range for the charging station. Nominal voltage
+24 VDC The following table shows the possible, permissible rated voltage for the tabletop power supply unit. Tolerance range 19.2 V to 28.8 V (20%, +20%) Nominal voltage 230 VAC 120 VAC Tolerance range 170 to 264 V 85 to 132 V 3.5 Required properties of the WLAN connection Please observe the installation guidelines when installing the WLAN network. Further information on this is available in the system manual "Fundamentals of industrial wireless LAN", in the "Network architecture" chapter. NOTICE As a basic principle, WLAN in accordance with IEEE 802.11 a should be used with the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN. We recommend you not to use roaming in applications with PROFIsafe communication. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 57 Planning application 3.6 Effective ranges and zones Ad hoc mode See also Ad hoc mode cannot be used in conjunction with the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN. Description of interfaces on the HMI device (Page 313) 3.6 Effective ranges and zones 3.6.1 Division of the system into effective ranges and zones Effective ranges Safety-related operator inputs are only possible in a limited area upstream of a machine or system. This is known as the effective range. The effective range assumes that the operator has a clear view the machine without any obstructions. To perform safety-related operator inputs, the operator must log the HMI device onto the effective range. Note You can also operate the HMI device without any effective ranges being defined in the system. Note Zones and effective ranges are completely independent of each other. Rules for effective ranges A maximum for 127 effective ranges can be defined for each project. An effective range requires at least one transponder. An effective range can be formed by a maximum of 127 transponders. Effective ranges must not overlap. An effective range is defined by the maximum distance of the HMI device from one or more transponders. The same maximum distance applies to all transponders in an effective range. The assignment of transponders to effective ranges is predefined in the project. Example 58 The following figure shows an example with three effective ranges. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Planning application 3.6 Effective ranges and zones
Effective range 1, formed by a transponder Effective range 2, formed by two transponders The Mobile Panel is in effective range 3. The system can be divided into different zones. A zone might be where part of a particular industrial process is carried out, for example assembly of parts. Zone-specific process displays and possible operations can be configured in the project. Note You can also operate the HMI device without any zones being defined in the system. Zones Rules governing zones A maximum of 254 zones is possible. A zone requires at least one transponder. A zone can be formed by a maximum of 255 transponders. Zones must not overlap. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 59 Planning application 3.6 Effective ranges and zones A zone is defined by the maximum distance of the HMI device from one or more transponders. The same maximum distance applies to all transponders in a zone. The assignment of transponders to zones is defined in the project. Example The figure below shows an example with two zones:
Zone 1, formed by 2 transponders Zone 2, formed by 1 transponder Transponder Each transponder has a unique ID. The transmitting range of the transponder approximates to a lobe shape with a range of approximately 8 m. The ID is set directly on the transponder. The set ID must match the project parameterization. Distances are measured as follows:
The HMI device sends signals in the current project The transponder responds to the signal from the HMI device and sends its ID to the HMI device The HMI device measures the distance between it and the transponder(s). Thus the HMI device determines which effective range/zone it is currently in. Rules governing transponders The following rules apply to assigning transponders:
A transponder can only be assigned to one zone. A transponder can only be assigned to one effective range. A transponder can be assigned to a zone and an effective range simultaneously. 60 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 See also Ranges in the plant (Page 27) Planning application 3.6 Effective ranges and zones 3.6.2 Distance measurement between HMI device and transponder The transmitting range of the transponder and the receiving area of the HMI device approximate to a lobe shape with a range of approximately 8 m. More information can be found in chapter Radiation characteristic (Page 314) . Distance measurement between the HMI device and the transponder is only possible if both devices are within the other's receiving area. The table below shows when distance measurement is feasible. In the figures, the HMI device is shown as a circle and the transponder as a square. HMI device in transponder's transmitting range Transponder in HMI device's receiving area Result Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Distance measurement successful Distance measurement not possible Distance measurement not possible Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 61 Planning application 3.6 Effective ranges and zones Aligning the HMI device to the transponder You must align the HMI device to the transponder to enable them to recognize one another. The further away the HMI device is from the transponder, the more accurately it and, therefore, the antennae's main direction of radiation, must be aligned to the transponder. It is only permissible to turn the HMI device very slightly. The closer the HMI device is to the transponder, the further you can turn the HMI device away from the transponder. At a distance of 8 m, the permissible angle of deviation is about 20. At a distance of 4 m, the permissible angle of deviation is about 110 . The figure below shows an example of the possible angle of rotation in relation to the distance from the transponder. See also Transponder (Page 25) 3.6.3 Planning effective ranges Effective range and transponder An effective range is formed physically by transponders. Transponders must be mounted in the perimeter around the machine in such a manner that the planned effective range is covered by the transmitting range of the transponders assigned to it. Example:
62 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Planning application 3.6 Effective ranges and zones
Machine that will be operated from within the effective range Transponder with transmitting range in the form of a lobe Planned effective range;
Assuming that the Mobile Panel is aligned with the effective range, fail-safe operation of the machine is possible. Actual effective range, safe operation is still possible from here. Rules for effective ranges The following rules apply when defining effective ranges:
Rule The distance between the transponder and the HMI device must not be longer than 8m. The effective range must be sized in such a way that it can be fully seen by the operator. The distance between the machine to be operated and the operator must be sized depending on the machine. Machine, transponder and operator position must be aligned with each other. Effective ranges should not overlap. Consequently you should only assign each transponder to a single effective range. Transponders in different effective ranges must be far enough away from each other that their transmission ranges do not overlap. You can set up a maximum of 127 effective ranges in a project. A maximum of 127 transponders can be assigned to one effective range. Explanation System limits Too great or an unclear effective range prevents visual control on the part of the operator. Insufficient distance from the machine increases the injury hazard for the user. Too great a distance from the machine prevents visual control on the part of the operator. The HMI device must be able to measure the distance to the transponder during operation. To do this, you have to align the HMI device with the transponder. The operator must be able to see the the machine at the same time. Assignment of effective range to the machine that will be operated must be unique. System limits System limits Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 63 Planning application 3.6 Effective ranges and zones Procedure 1. On the system plan specify which parts of the system will be operated with the enabling buttons. You require effective ranges for these areas of the system. 2. Specify the spatial expansion of the individual effective ranges. The operator must be located within the limits of the respective effective range in order to operate the corresponding plant unit with the enabling buttons. Comply with the rules for the definition of effective ranges. Take special note that the effective range is not too large so that it cannot be seen or that any other hazards occur. 3. Plan the transponders in the effective range in such a manner that the effective range is covered by the radiated emission of the transponders. Also note that the effective range is not too large so that it cannot be seen or that any other hazards occur. 4. Define:
A name, a display name and an ID from the value range 1 to 65534 for each effective range A name and a plant-unique ID for each transponder from the value range 1 to 65534 For each effective range the maximum distance that the HMI device can have to the transponders of this effective range. The distance must be the same for all transponders of an effective range. The mounting location for an indicator, for example a light that shows that an HMI device is logged in in the effective range. 5. On the system plan, note the display names and the IDs that you use during commissioning. Prior to commissioning you must affix the IDs of the effective ranges in the plant so that they are easily legible. 64 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Installation and connection 4.1 Checking the package contents 4 Check the package contents for visible signs of transport damage and for completeness. NOTICE Do not install parts damaged during shipment. In the case of damaged parts, contact your Siemens representative. The documentation belongs to the HMI device and is required for subsequent commissioning. Keep the supplied documentation to hand throughout the entire service life of the HMI device. You must pass on the enclosed documentation to any subsequent owner or user of the HMI device. Make sure that every supplement to the documentation that you receive is stored together with the operating instructions. The following is supplied along with the HMI device:
HMI device Main battery Bridging battery Function manual "Fail-safe operation of the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN", in German CD The CD includes:
Function manual "Fail-safe operation of the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN", in German, English and Japanese F-FBs for the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Cover cap with rubber seal Screws for fixing the cover cap Label for cover cap Additional documents may be included in the delivery. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 65 Installation and connection 4.2 Mounting the charging station 4.2 Mounting the charging station Requirements 4 x M6 cylinder head screws, with nuts if required You have selected a location with a low ambient temperature To charge the batteries, the ambient temperature / battery temperature must not exceed 40 C You have selected a position for the charging station that is easy and safe to reach You have selected a good ergonomic height for the charging station Procedure Result See also Proceed as follows:
1. Place the charging station from the front onto the mounting surface. 2. Mark the fastening holes with a marking-off tool. 3. Drill 4 through holes or 4 x M6 threaded holes. 4. Mount the charging station. The charging station is now mounted. Mounting location and clearance of charging station (Page 54) Application and ambient conditions (Page 51) 4.3 Setting transponder ID and inserting the battery Introduction Requirements To operate the transponder you must first insert the batteries and set the transponder ID. The transponder ID is read and evaluated by the HMI device in the current project. Torx screwdriver, size T10 Screwdriver, size 0 3 AA mignon batteries, 1.5 V, included in delivery 66 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Installation and connection 4.3 Setting transponder ID and inserting the battery Procedure for opening the transponder
Screws Cover 1. Loosen the four marked screws. 2. Lay the cover aside. The cover is designed in such a way that the screws cannot be lost. Rotary coding switch and batteries The following figure shows the position of the 4 rotary coding switches and the batteries in the transponder. Rotary coding switch Batteries
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 67 Installation and connection 4.3 Setting transponder ID and inserting the battery Example for setting the transponder ID
Rotary coding switches for 4th decade, MSB: most significant byte Rotary coding switches for 3rd decade Rotary coding switches for 2nd decade Rotary coding switches for 1st decade, LSB: least significant byte Set value: 3 Set value: A Set value: 2 Set value: 7 The figure shows the set transponder ID 3A27H, i.e. 14,887, in decimal format. Procedure CAUTION ESD When working in the open housing, ensure that current-carrying conductors do not come into contact with electrical circuits. Note the ESD instructions. Proceed as follows:
1. Insert the batteries as shown on the printed circuit board. 2. Set the transponder ID with the help of a screwdriver. Please note the MSB and LSB markings on the printed circuit board. Set the hexadecimal transponder ID. The values permitted in hexadecimal format are 1 to FFFE, i.e. decimal format from 1 to 65,534. 3. Screw down the cover on the transponder. NOTICE Damage to thread The transponder housing is made of plastic. Therefore, the mounting hole threads cannot handle the same amount of stress as a comparable metallic housing. If the screws are tightened more than 20 times, there is risk of damage to the threads. Only tighten the screws with the permitted torque of 0.40.5 Nm. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 68 Result See also Installation and connection 4.4 Mounting the transponder The batteries have been inserted in the transponder. The transponder ID is now set. Distance measurement between HMI device and transponder (Page 61) 4.4 Mounting the transponder Requirements 2 x M4 cylinder head screws, with nuts if required The batteries have been fitted in the transponder and the ID is set You have selected a position that provides good illumination for the desired area The transmitting range of the transponder and the receiving area of the HMI device approximate to a lobe shape with a range of approximately 8 m. More information can be found in chapter Radiation characteristic (Page 314) . Procedure Proceed as follows:
1. Place the transponder from the front onto the mounting surface. 2. Mark the fastening holes with a marking-off tool. 3. Drill two through holes or two threaded holes M4. 4. Attach the transponder. Result The transponder is now mounted. 4.5 Electrical installation Electrical connections The following connection options are available:
HMI device Charging station Tabletop power supply unit Configuring PC Supply voltage Yes Yes Yes Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 69 Installation and connection 4.6 Connection of the charging station to the power supply 4.6 Connection of the charging station to the power supply The charging station is mounted according to the specifications in this document. Cable plug included in the scope of supply Three-core cable, flexible, 0.75 mm End sleeves Requirements Pin assignment Pin 1 2 3 4 Assignment
+24 VDC n. c. GND 24 V PE Procedure for mounting the cable plug 1. Screw the cables to the contacts in the socket insert and mount the socket. The following figure shows an exploded view of the cable plug:
70
Socket insert Coupling bush Seal Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Installation and connection 4.7 Connecting the HMI device Fastening case Cable seal Procedure for connecting the charging station 1. Connect the supply line to the power supply. 2. Connect the cable plug to the counterpart on the charging station. Result See also The charging station is now connected to the power supply. The "POWER" LED lights up green when the power supply to the charging station is within the nominal range. Rated voltages (Page 57) 4.7 Connecting the HMI device 4.7.1 Opening and closing the terminal compartment Introduction You can open the connection bay of the HMI device during operation. Before you begin:
CAUTION Malfunctions If the HMI device is switched on and resting on its front, the following can be activated:
The emergency stop button This can bring the system to a standstill unintentionally. The key-operated switch or an illuminated pushbutton This can result in malfunctions. NOTICE Damage to the HMI device Pay attention to cleanliness. Foreign bodies or liquids must not come into contact with the printed circuit board or penetrate the inside of the HMI device. Place the HMI device with the front side facing down on a flat, clean surface to protect against damage. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 71 Installation and connection 4.7 Connecting the HMI device CAUTION Shutdown or rampdown of the system When you open the connection bay, you remove the main battery. This failure of the main battery is bridged by the bridge battery, if fitted. The maximum buffer time is 5 minutes. If you exceed the buffer time, the HMI device will switch off. If the HMI device has been integrated, this will lead to a shutdown or rampdown of the system. Do not exceed the buffer time!
Requirements Cross-head screwdriver, size 2 Battery compartment and connection bay
Locking latch Connection bay cover Connection for tabletop power supply unit Battery compartment cover Charging contacts for charging station USB interface
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 72 Installation and connection 4.7 Connecting the HMI device Note Sequence for opening Always remove the battery compartment cover first and remove the main battery before opening the connection bay cover. Procedure for opening the battery compartment Proceed as follows:
1. Pull up the locking latch on the battery compartment cover. The battery compartment cover can now be opened. 2. Remove the battery compartment cover. Result The battery compartment is open. The main battery, if fitted, is visible. NOTICE Damage to the HMI device The connection bay cover is connected to the HMI device's housing by wiring. Close the connection bay cover carefully. Procedure for opening the connection bay CAUTION The connection bay may only be opened by trained skilled personnel for service purposes. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 73 Installation and connection 4.7 Connecting the HMI device CAUTION Damage to the HMI device When the connection bay is open the HMI device is vulnerable to damage from mechanical influences and live parts. If a bridging battery is fitted in the HMI device or the tabletop power supply unit is connected, some parts of the HMI device will still be electrically live. Please observe the following:
If you have connected a tabletop power supply unit, isolate the unit from the HMI device if possible. CAUTION Damage to the HMI device When the connection bay is open the HMI device is vulnerable to damage from electrostatic discharge. ESD When working in the open housing, ensure that current-carrying conductors do not come into contact with electrical circuits. Note the ESD instructions. 1. Remove the main battery (if fitted) using the ribbon. The bridging battery and the memory card, if fitted, are now visible. 2. Unscrew the six screws approximately 1 cm out of the cover. The cover is designed in such a way that the screws cannot be lost. 3. Open the cover. Result The connection bay is open. 74 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Installation and connection 4.7 Connecting the HMI device
Connection bay cover Rubber seal Wiring to charging contacts Antenna Contacts for main battery Note Only use the connection bay to insert the memory card and bridging battery! Do not insert any other objects in the connection bay. Notes for closing CAUTION Damage to thread The HMI device housing is made of plastic. Therefore, the mounting hole threads cannot handle the same amount of stress as a comparable metallic housing. If the screws are tightened more than 20 times, there is risk of damage to the threads. Do not exceed 0.4 to 0.5 Nm of torque when tightening the screws. NOTICE Damage to wiring at charging contacts When closing the connection bay cover, be careful not to trap the wiring at the charging contacts. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 75 Installation and connection 4.7 Connecting the HMI device CAUTION IP65 degree of protection not fulfilled Ensure that the seals belonging to the connection bay cover and battery compartment cover are present during mounting. After completing the connections, check whether the covers are fitted on the USB interface and the terminal for the tabletop power supply unit. Procedure for closing the connection bay and battery compartment 1. Place the cover on the connection bay. Be careful with the wiring to the charging contacts. 2. Tighten the 6 cover screws. 3. Insert the main battery. 4. Replace the cover on the battery compartment. The fastener of the battery compartment cover must engage below the locking latch. Result The connection bay and battery compartment of the HMI device are now closed. 4.7.2 Interfaces of the HMI device The following figure shows the interfaces of the HMI device. 76
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Installation and connection 4.7 Connecting the HMI device Connection for tabletop power supply unit Cable connector for wiring to charging contacts RJ45 jack for PROFINET Reset button Connection for bridging battery USB interface CAUTION Degree of protection IP 65 not fulfilled If you want to use the RJ45 interface, you must first open the connection bay. If the connection bay is open, degree of protection IP 65 is not fulfilled. Only use the RJ45 jack for the connector of the configuring PC when resetting to factory settings. CAUTION Shutdown or rampdown of the system Triggering the reset button results in the following:
The HMI device switching off and restarting If the HMI device has been integrated, the F-CPU triggers a local shutdown or a global rampdown. Only press the reset button in an emergency. USB jack and connector for tabletop power supply unit The USB jack and the connector for the tabletop power supply unit are shown as plugs. See also Description of interfaces on the HMI device (Page 313) 4.7.3 Connecting the configuring PC Requirements For connection via PROFINET (LAN via RJ 45 interface):
The connection bay on the HMI device is open. For connection via PROFINET (WLAN):
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 77 Installation and connection 4.7 Connecting the HMI device Note You must connect the HMI device to the configuring PC in infrastructure mode. An ad hoc network is not possible. The HMI device must be in an area with sufficient WLAN quality. It must be possible for the configuring PC to be contacted via WLAN. Connection graphic The following figure illustrates the connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC. You can transfer the following data between the HMI device and a configuring PC:
Project HMI device image Additional project data
NOTICE USB connection sequence Observe the following sequence when connecting by USB:
1. HMI device 2. PC USB Host-to-Host cable Only use the driver for the USB host cable, which is included in the WinCC flexible package. Never use the driver supplied with the USB Host-to-Host cable. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 78 Restoring factory settings Installation and connection 4.7 Connecting the HMI device Note To update the operating system and reset to factory settings, you must connect the HMI device to the configuring PC via the RJ45 interface. Note For a point-to-point connection, use a cross cable. The HMI device and the PC can also be part of a LAN network. CAUTION Degree of protection IP 65 not fulfilled If you connect the configuring PC directly to the HMI device through the RJ45 interface, you must open the connection bay. If the connection bay is open, degree of protection IP 65 is not fulfilled. NOTICE Damage to the HMI device Pay attention to cleanliness. Foreign bodies or liquids must not come into contact with the printed circuit board or penetrate the inside of the HMI device. Only connect a configuring PC directly to the HMI device for a short period. The ports are described in the specifications. See also Interfaces of the HMI device (Page 76) 4.7.4 Connecting the PLC Introduction Only use approved components to connect a SIMATIC S7 PLC. You can find more information about this on the Internet at:http://mall.automation.siemens.com. Note A SIMATIC S7F is vital for fail-safe functionality. The HMI device cannot be operated without fail-safe communication. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 79 Installation and connection 4.7 Connecting the HMI device Connection graphic The following figure shows the connection between the PLC and the HMI device.
See also Interfaces of the HMI device (Page 76) Communication (Page 32) 4.7.5 Connecting the printer Introduction Printers are connected to the HMI device via WLAN. The current list of recommended printers for the HMI devices can be found on the Internet under http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/11376409. Observe the supplied printer documentation when you connect the printer. Connection graphic Note It is not possible to connect a printer to the HMI device's USB interface. The following figure illustrates the connection between the HMI device and a printer. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 80 Installation and connection 4.7 Connecting the HMI device
4.7.6 Connecting USB devices The following devices can be connected to the USB port of the HMI device:
External mouse External keyboard USB memory stick Note when connecting NOTICE Devices with a separate power supply Except for the configuring PC or PC, do not connect any device with a separate power supply to the USB interface. You can connect the configuring PC or PC to the USB interface for transferring, saving and restoring data. NOTICE Additional load for battery Devices without a separate power supply cause additional load on the battery when they are connected to the USB interface. This will reduce the battery's operation time. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 81 Installation and connection 4.7 Connecting the HMI device NOTICE Functional problem If USB devices overload the interface, malfunctions might occur. Observe the values for the maximum load of the USB interface. You will find the values in the technical specifications. NOTICE Access to USB interface is not possible The USB interface is disabled while the main battery is being changed. During a main battery change it is not possible to export recipes and archives to a USB memory stick, for example. Make sure no one tries to access the USB interface while the main battery is being changed. See also Interfaces of the HMI device (Page 76) 4.7.7 Connecting the tabletop power supply unit Introduction 82 The tabletop power supply unit is used to power the HMI device and to charge the battery in the HMI device in 120 V and 230 V networks. The setting of the voltage range takes place automatically. The tabletop power supply unit is connected with the power supply cable by the input connector. CAUTION Danger of overheating Do not cover the tabletop power supply unit. CAUTION Please note that the mains connector must be removed for a complete disconnection from the mains. NOTICE Only use the tabletop power supply unit approved for the HMI device. The tabletop power supply unit is only suitable for an office environment. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Installation and connection 4.8 Inserting, charging and changing the battery The tabletop power supply unit is supplied with power supply cables for the following countries:
UK US EU Japan 1. Remove the cover from the plug of the HMI device. 2. Connect the tabletop power supply unit to the HMI device. 3. Connect the tabletop power supply unit to the mains with the correct power supply cable. Procedure See also Rated voltages (Page 57) 4.8 Inserting, charging and changing the battery 4.8.1 Safety instructions CAUTION Incorrect charging and discharging of the battery Charging and discharging the battery In the following cases, there is a risk of fire and, in extreme cases, explosion!
Reverse polarity Short-circuit Only charge the bridging battery in the HMI device. Only charge the main battery in the HMI device or in the charging compartment of the charging station. CAUTION Danger of injury If used incorrectly, fluid can leak from the battery. Avoid contact with the battery fluid. If fluid comes into contact with the skin, rinse with water. If fluid comes into contact with the eyes, rinse with water and seek medical advice. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 83 Installation and connection 4.8 Inserting, charging and changing the battery 84 CAUTION The battery is a lithium ion battery. The following safety notes apply to these rechargeable batteries:
Do not crush Do not expose to heat and do not burn Do not short-circuit Do not take apart Do not submerge in liquids - the battery could crack or explode. Store unused batteries away from the following items, which can cause the contacts to be bridged. Paper clips Coins Keys Nails Screws or other small metal objects CAUTION Possibility of rampdown while logging onto effective range If the HMI device no longer recognizes the transponder and, therefore, the measuring range, it triggers a rampdown. To change the battery, rest the HMI device on its front. Align the HMI device so that it is still possible to measure the distance between the HMI device and the transponder. If possible, log the HMI device off from the effective range. CAUTION Malfunctions If the HMI device is resting on its front, the following can be activated:
The emergency stop button This can bring the system to a standstill unintentionally. The key-operated switch or an illuminated pushbutton This can result in malfunctions. ESD When working in the open housing, ensure that current-carrying conductors do not come into contact with electrical circuits. Note the ESD instructions. NOTICE Only use batteries that are approved for the HMI device. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Installation and connection 4.8 Inserting, charging and changing the battery NOTICE Pay attention to cleanliness. Foreign bodies or liquids must not come into contact with the printed circuit board or penetrate the inside of the HMI device. Place the HMI device with the front side facing down on a flat, clean surface to protect against damage. Disposal See also Used lithium ion batteries are special waste. Please dispose of used lithium ion batteries properly according to the appropriate regulations. Label transport packaging with the words:
"USED LITHIUM BATTERIES". Distance measurement between HMI device and transponder (Page 61) 4.8.2 Inserting batteries for the first time NOTICE To charge the batteries, the ambient temperature / battery temperature must not exceed 40 C The higher the temperature, the longer it will take for the battery to charge. Find a place with a cool ambient temperature for the charging station. If necessary, allow the battery to cool first. The batteries are delivered uncharged. Please note that a battery is subject to a natural self-discharge. The self-discharge can lead to a complete discharge over long periods of disuse. Requirements for inserting the bridging battery You have opened the battery compartment and connection compartment of the HMI device. Procedure for inserting the bridging battery Observe the safety information!
Proceed as follows:
1. Plug the bridging battery's plug connector into the interface in the connection compartment. The plug connector is coded. There is no risk of incorrect connection. 2. Insert the bridging battery. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 85 Installation and connection 4.8 Inserting, charging and changing the battery 3. Align the line as shown in the figure. Ensure that the line runs underneath the cable entry. Result The bridging battery is now fitted. The following figure shows the bridging battery inserted in the connection compartment.
Cable routing Requirements for inserting the main battery The connection compartment is open. The battery compartment is open. Procedure for inserting the main battery 1. Place the main battery in the battery compartment. 2. Close the battery compartment. Result The main battery is inserted. The following figure shows the main battery in the battery compartment. 86 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Installation and connection 4.8 Inserting, charging and changing the battery Charging the battery The batteries are charged automatically whenever the HMI device is placed in the charging station or connected to the tabletop power supply unit. See also Safety instructions (Page 83) 4.8.3 Displaying battery status The battery's charging condition can be displayed in the following ways:
On the main battery itself By the BAT LED on the HMI device In the "OP" dialog box, "Battery" tab in the Control Panel In a running project, if configured Procedure for displaying the charging condition on the main battery itself The LED display on the main battery consists of 5 LEDs.
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 87 Installation and connection 4.8 Inserting, charging and changing the battery Pushbutton LED display Briefly press the pushbutton on the battery. The LEDs on the LED display will briefly light up to show the charging condition. The LEDs will light up according to the charging status. If all the LEDs light up, the battery is fully charged. If no LEDs light up, the battery is flat. 4.8.4 Changing the main battery Introduction 88 CAUTION Shutdown or global rampdown If the bridging battery can no longer be charged, the HMI device will switch off the next time the main battery is changed. Change the bridging battery at least every 5 years. Note Change the main battery in good time!
We recommend that you replace the battery when it can only be charged to 50%. This is the case after approximately 500 complete charging cycles. A charging cycle is complete when the battery is fully charged. Example:
The battery has a charging condition of 80%. It needs another 20% before it is fully charged. The battery is charged. This charging process counts as one fifth of a complete charging cycle. We recommend keeping an inventory of spare main batteries. You can replace the main battery during operation. The bridging battery supplies power to the HMI device while the main battery is being changed. The maximum buffer time is 5 minutes. While the power is being drawn from the bridging battery, the following features are deactivated:
Display backlighting The function keys and associated LEDs All LEDs except for "SAFE" and "RNG"
The illuminated pushbuttons and handwheel USB interface Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Installation and connection 4.8 Inserting, charging and changing the battery NOTICE Access to USB interface is not possible The USB interface is deactivated while the main battery is changed. Make sure no one tries to access the USB interface while the main battery is being changed. Requirements Procedure Result Disposal See also You have opened the battery compartment of the HMI device Observe the safety information. Proceed as follows:
1. If the HMI device is logged onto the effective range, log it off. 2. Remove the main battery using the ribbon. 3. Insert the new main battery. 4. Close the battery compartment. The main battery has been changed. Used lithium ion batteries are special waste. Please dispose of used lithium ion batteries properly according to the appropriate regulations. Label transport packaging with the words:
"USED LITHIUM BATTERIES". Safety instructions (Page 83) Power management (Page 98) 4.8.5 Changing the bridging battery Introduction The bridging battery is charged automatically in the following cases:
The HMI device is placed in the charging station The main battery in the HMI device is sufficiently charged The HMI device is connected to the tabletop power supply unit Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 89 Installation and connection 4.8 Inserting, charging and changing the battery Requirements Procedure CAUTION Shutdown or global rampdown If the bridging battery can no longer be charged, the HMI device will switch off the next time the main battery is changed. Change the bridging battery at least every 5 years. NOTICE Bridging of main battery not possible After the bridging battery is changed it must first be recharged before the main battery can be bridged. Do not change the main battery immediately after changing the bridging battery. Check the charging status of the bridging battery first. The "Battery" tab in the "OP" dialog box in the Control Panel displays the charging status and temperature of the main battery and bridging battery. The project on the HMI device is complete and the HMI device is switched off You have opened the battery compartment of the HMI device Observe the safety information!
Proceed as follows:
1. Remove the main battery using the ribbon. 2. Open the connection bay. 3. Disconnect the plug connector of the bridging battery. 4. Remove the bridging battery. 5. Plug the plug connector of the new bridging battery into the interface in the connection bay. The plug connector is coded. There is no risk of incorrect connection. 6. Insert the new bridging battery. 7. Align the lines. 8. Close the connection bay. 9. Insert the main battery. 10. Replace the cover on the battery compartment. The fastener of the battery compartment cover must engage below the locking latch. 90 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Installation and connection 4.9 Switching on and testing the HMI device The bridging battery has been changed. Used lithium ion batteries are special waste. Please dispose of used lithium ion batteries properly according to the appropriate regulations. Label transport packaging with the words:
"USED LITHIUM BATTERIES". Result Disposal See also Safety instructions (Page 83) 4.9 Switching on and testing the HMI device Requirements Procedure In order to switch on the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN, one of the following requirements must be met:
The batteries have been charged and inserted in the HMI device The HMI device is placed in the charging station The HMI device is connected to the tabletop power supply unit Proceed as follows:
1. To switch the HMI device on, briefly press the ON/OFF button. The "PWR" LED lights up. The screen lights up. A progress bar is displayed during startup. The Loader is displayed once the operating system has started. If a charged battery is available, the "BAT" LED lights up green. If the HMI device does not start, the battery may be empty or not available for use. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 91 Installation and connection 4.9 Switching on and testing the HMI device Transfer The HMI device automatically switches to "Transfer" mode if the following requirements have been met:
No project is loaded on the device At least one data channel has been configured On first commissioning, there is no project on the HMI device and no data channel has been parameterized. While communication is being established, the following dialog box is displayed:
Press "Cancel" to stop the transfer. The Loader appears. Result 92 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Starting and transferring a project Installation and connection 4.9 Switching on and testing the HMI device Note When restarting the system, a project may already be loaded on the HMI device. The project will then start either following a delay (whose duration can be adjusted) or when you press the "Start" button. When the project starts, the following dialog boxes will appear:
"Establishing secure connection"
"Testing enabling button"
If you want to transfer another project, for example, proceed as follows:
Close the project and restart the HMI device. Select "Transfer" to start the transfer. If necessary, parameterize the required data channel. Function test Check whether the HMI device is fully functional. The HMI device is fully functional when one of the following states is indicated after switching on:
The "Transfer" dialog is displayed. The Loader appears The "Test enabling button" dialog box appears. Switching off the HMI device To switch the HMI device off, press the ON/OFF button on the HMI device for at least 4 seconds. If the project has been started, the "Confirm removal" dialog box appears following a prompt. 1. Press one of the enabling buttons to confirm the dialog box. The HMI device is removed. The current project is terminated. The HMI device switches off. See also Inserting batteries for the first time (Page 85) Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 93 Operator controls and displays 5.1 Overview 5 The following figure shows the operator controls and displays of the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN. This can vary, depending on the delivery condition of the HMI device.
LED display Emergency stop button Display with touch screen ON/OFF button Covers for the labeling strip guides Key-operated switch, optional Membrane keyboard Handwheel, optional Illuminated pushbutton, optional Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 95 Operator controls and displays 5.2 Displays on the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operator control functions The functions assigned to the function keys, the handwheel, the key-operated switch and the illuminated pushbuttons are determined during configuration. The above-mentioned operator controls do not function outside of a project. Evaluation and selection of the operator controls The following information can be transferred between the HMI device and the PLC:
Direction pulses of the handwheel Status of the function keys Status of the key-operated switch State of the illuminated pushbuttons State of the function keys and illuminated pushbutton LEDs There are two ways of transmitting information:
Direct keys System functions of WinCC flexible Standard input unit The standard input unit on the HMI device is the touch screen. All operating elements required for touch operation are displayed on the touch screen once the HMI device has started. NOTICE Damage to the touch screen Never touch the touch screen with pointed or sharp objects. Avoid applying excessive pressure to the touch screen with hard objects. Both these will substantially reduce the useful life of the touch screen and even lead to total failure. Always operate the HMI touch screen with your fingers or with a touch pen. Damage to the keyboard Pressing the keys with a hard instrument considerably reduces the service life of the key mechanism. Always use your fingers to operate the keys of your HMI device. 5.2 Displays on the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Introduction 96 On the front of the Mobile Panel there are 5 LEDs that show the states of the HMI device and communication. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Operator controls and displays 5.2 Displays on the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN
LED display Meaning of the LED displays The LEDs are only activated when the HMI device is switched on. Functions PROFIsafe communication Designation SAFE Power PWR Color Meaning Yellow The "SAFE" LED lights up when the HMI device is integrated in the safety program of the F CPU. The requirement for this is that PROFIsafe communication has been established. If the "SAFE" LED lights up, the emergency stop button is effective. Green The "PWR" LED only lights up or flashes when the HMI device is switched on. The "PWR" LED lights up under the following circumstances:
The battery is fitted and charged. The HMI device is in the charging station. The HMI device is connected to the tabletop power supply unit Communication COM The "PWR" LED flashes when the HMI device is in the
"POWER SAVE 2" state. Green The "COM" LED remains off as long as no WLAN network is configured. The "COM" LED flashes when the HMI device is attempting to establish a connection to a WLAN network. The "COM" LED lights up when the HMI device has established a connection to a WLAN network. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 97 Operator controls and displays 5.3 Power management Functions Effective range RNG Designation Battery status BAT Green/
red Color Meaning Green The "RNG" lights up when the HMI device is logged onto the effective range. If a communication error occurs after the HMI device has logged onto the effective range, the "RNG" lights up until PROFIsafe communication is reestablished and the communication error has been acknowledged. The "RNG" LED goes out when the HMI device logs off from the effective range. The "BAT" LED goes out under the following circumstances:
The main battery is empty The main battery is not installed The "BAT" LED flashes when the main battery is being charged. The "BAT" LED lights up red when the main battery has a charging status of less than 10%. The "BAT" LED lights up green when the main battery has a charging status of at least 10%. 5.3 Power management Introduction States The HMI device is equipped with a power management function. If you do not operate the HMI device for a configurable time interval, power management will switch the HMI device to power save mode. This extends the operation time of the HMI device until the next battery change or charging of the battery. Power management has two levels of power saving:
"Power Save 1"
Reduces the brightness of the touch screen.
"Power Save 2"
The touch screen is switched off. The function keys and associated LEDs are switched off. The handwheel and the illuminated pushbuttons are switched off. Other power save measures are activated. In WinCC flexible, power management is parameterized in "Device settings" under "Power management". 98 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Operator controls and displays 5.3 Power management
"Power Save 1" corresponds to the "Reduce brightness" setting.
"Power Save 2" corresponds to the "Switch off screen" setting. Note When the HMI device is logged onto an effective range, the "Power Save 2" state is not possible. Power management recognizes the following status change:
State LED display The "PWR" LED is off. HMI device The "BAT" LED is off. OFF HMI device ON The "PWR" LED lights up.
"Power Save 1" The "PWR" LED lights up. Reduces the brightness of the touch screen.
"Power Save 2" The "PWR" LED flashes. The touch screen is switched off. Successful action for resulting state Briefly press the ON/OFF button HMI device ON Resulting state HMI device ON
"Power Save 1"
"Power Save 2"
HMI device OFF Automatically, after a configured time interval if no operations are carried out. Briefly press the ON/OFF button Press the ON/OFF button for at least 4 seconds Operation on touch screen or using function keys Briefly press the ON/OFF button Automatically, after a configured time interval if no operations are carried out Press the ON/OFF button for at least 4 seconds Briefly press the ON/OFF button HMI device ON Press the ON/OFF button for at HMI device OFF least 4 seconds
"Power Save 2"
"Power Save 2"
HMI device OFF Pressing the ON/OFF button for at least 4 seconds initiates the following:
The current project on the HMI device is terminated, following several prompts. The HMI device switches off. Note In the "Power Save 2" state it is no longer possible to connect via the RJ 45 interface. Setting the screen saver (Page 152) See also Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 99 Operator controls and displays 5.4 Safety-related operator controls 5.4 Safety-related operator controls 5.4.1 Emergency stop button Introduction The emergency stop button is designed with 2-channels and enables an emergency stop of the configured system. The emergency stop button satisfies the requirements specified in DIN IEC 60947-5-5;1997 Annex K. For additional safety instructions please refer to the section titled "Safety instructions, standards and notes". When using the emergency stop button the following F-FBs must be linked in the safety program of the F CPU:
F_FB_MP F_FB_RNG_n
Fall protection Emergency stop button Due to its position, the emergency stop button is equally accessible for both left-handed and right-handed persons. Due to its profiled design, the emergency stop button is easily accessible. A collared enclosure serves as protection if the device falls. Thus if the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 100 Operation Operator controls and displays 5.4 Safety-related operator controls should fall down, the emergency stop button will not be activated. However the emergency stop button is extensively protected against damage. The operator triggers the emergency stop by pressing the emergency stop button. The emergency stop button engages in the emergency stop position. Releasing the emergency stop button WARNING If you have activated the emergency stop button and thereby brought the configured system to a standstill, the emergency stop button should only be released under the following conditions:
The reasons for the emergency stop have been eliminated. A safe restart is possible. The restart should not be executed by releasing the emergency stop button. The operator must strictly ensure that he executes a separate operator action to commence the restart. The safety program must ensure that release of the emergency stop button alone does not trigger an automatic restart of the system. In order to release the emergency stop button, turn it in a clockwise direction. The emergency stop button then returns on its own to the initial position. NOTICE The emergency stop button can be triggered unintentionally The emergency stop button is evaluated under the following conditions:
The Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN is integrated in the safety program of the F CPU. The emergency stop button can be triggered unintentionally in the following cases, and bring the configured system to a standstill:
When opening one of the coverings on the rear of the HMI device If the HMI device falls down WARNING Non-functional emergency stop button The emergency stop button is only effective if the HMI device is in the charging station or if is operated with the battery. Do not operate the HMI device in the plant with the table power supply unit. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 101 Operator controls and displays 5.4 Safety-related operator controls Storing the HMI device See also WARNING Non-functional emergency stop button If the HMI device is not integrated in the safety program of the F CPU, the emergency stop button does not function. To avoid confusion between effective and non-effective emergency stop buttons, only one integrated HMI device should be freely accessible. If the HMI device is not in use, it must be stored in a locked cabinet. Safety functions of the emergency stop button (Page 43) 5.4.2 Enabling button Introduction The enabling device consists of the two enabling buttons mounted on both sides of the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN. The switch setting of the two enabling buttons is determined by electrical momentary contact switches. Note The HMI device analyzes the switch settings of the two enabling buttons in the form of an OR gate.
Enabling button Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 102 Operation Operator controls and displays 5.4 Safety-related operator controls WARNING Undesirable enabling function Only push the enabling button until the operation which you enabled has been completed. The enabling function is an intentional operator action. It is not permissible to constantly hold the enabling button or lock it otherwise. If you leave the effective range only briefly for a time period of up to 30 seconds while the enabling button is pressed, the following occurs: 5 seconds after you have left the effective range, the enabling function is revoked. If you return to the effective range within 30 seconds with the enabling button still pressed, the enabling function is automatically returned. The enabling button has three switch settings:
Neutral position: The enabling button is not pressed. Enable: The enabling button is pressed to a mid position. This switch setting is used to allow another command, for example an input with the membrane keyboard. Panic: The switch setting "Panic" is achieved as soon as one of the enabling buttons have been pressed. The switch setting of the other enabling button is irrelevant in this case. The switch setting "Panic" has the same effect as releasing the enabling button, namely revoking the enable. You only have to activate one enabling button. The PLC receives the same signal regardless of whether only one or both enabling buttons of the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN having been pushed. Note The enabling button and the membrane keyboard can be operated at the same time. When using the enabling button the following F-FBs must be linked in the safety program of the F CPU:
F_FB_MP F_FB_RNG_n Switch settings The following figure shows the switching sequence for enable.
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 103 Operator controls and displays 5.5 Operator controls The following figure shows the switching sequence during panic usage.
If the operator has pressed the enabling button through to the "Panic" setting, the "Enable"
setting will not be evaluated when leaving the panic setting. A new enable can only be triggered by releasing the enabling button. 5.5 Operator controls 5.5.1 Handwheel Introduction The handwheel is an optional operator control on the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN. The handwheel can be turned without a stop and does not have a zero position.
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 104 Operation Handwheel with recess To facilitate operation, the handwheel has a small recess. Operator controls and displays 5.5 Operator controls 5.5.2 Key-operated switch Introduction The key-operated switch is an optional operator control on the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN. The key-operated switch is used to lock functions that can be triggered via the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN. Operation Key-operated switch
The followinig figure shows the three switch positions of the key-operated switch, I-0-II. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 105 Operator controls and displays 5.5 Operator controls
The key can be removed in the switch setting 0. Remove the key after use. This avoids possible damage to the key if the HMI device falls down. Note The key to the key-operated switch is supplied together with the HMI device. The key does not have an HMI device-dependent coding. This means the key can be used on any Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN. 5.5.3 Illuminated pushbutton Introduction The illuminated pushbuttons are optional operator controls on the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN. The illuminated pushbuttons are available for fast digital inputs. 106
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Operator controls and displays 5.5 Operator controls Illuminated pushbutton 5.5.4 Evaluation of the operator controls 5.5.4.1 Overview Operator controls The following information can be transferred between the HMI device and the PLC:
Direction pulses of the handwheel Status of the function keys Status of the key-operated switch State of the illuminated pushbuttons State of the function keys and illuminated pushbutton LEDs There are two ways of transmitting information:
Direct keys System functions of WinCC flexible Note The following sections are intended for the configuration engineer of the HMI device. 5.5.4.2 Evaluating operator controls as direct keys Introduction You can configure the operator controls of the HMI device as direct keys. The states of the following operator controls are available directly in the I/O area of the PLC:
Direction pulses of the handwheel The switching state of the function keys The switching state of the key-operated switch The switching state of the illuminated pushbuttons Byte assignment The following figure shows the assignment of the keys (inputs) and LEDs (outputs) to the bytes in the PLC process image. Check whether additional information is available in your plant documentation. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 107 Operator controls and displays 5.5 Operator controls
Bit for function key Bit for key-operated switch Bit for left illuminated pushbutton Bit for right illuminated pushbutton Bit for handwheel pulses, forwards Bit for handwheel pulses, backwards F S T1 T2 I D The bytes "n+6" to "n+9" contain the direct key bits for the touch buttons. The following tables show the bit coding for function keys, key-operated switch, illuminated pushbutton and handwheel:
Bit coding of function keys State Not pressed Pressed Bit coding of function key LEDs State LED not illuminated LED is illuminated Bit coding of key-operated switch F1 to F18 0 1 F1 to F18 0 1 State S0 0 1 0 Bit coding of illuminated pushbuttons Position 0 Position I Position II S1 0 0 1 Key position In middle position Turned in clockwise direction up to stop Turned counter-clockwise up to stop Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Bit coding 108 State Not pressed Pressed Bit coding of illuminated pushbutton LEDs T1 0 1 LED status Off On permanently Bit coding of handwheel T1 0 1 Operator controls and displays 5.5 Operator controls T2 0 1 T2 0 1 A setpoint is not specified for the handwheel. After start-up of the HMI device, the bytes "n+4" to "n+5" are set to zero. Rotation of the handwheel produces positive or negative pulses depending on the rotation direction. The number of positive pulses are stored in bits I0 to I7. The number of negative pulses are stored in bits D0 to D7. The values are entered in binary format, where bit 0 is the lowest and bit 7 is the highest valued bit. A complete handwheel revolution yields 50 pulses. Every pulse of the handwheel is added to byte "n+4" or "n+5" depending on the direction of rotation. There are no negative values. When the possible value range is exceeded, there is an overflow:
If a value of 255 is increased by one pulse, a value of 0 results. Example of bit coding for handwheel The following table includes an example for rotation direction determination. The pulses are stored in bytes "n+4" and "n+5" and are measured during the points in time t1 to t4. The numbers in the following table represent a byte in the PLC. Evaluation time Handwheel Evaluation Pulses, forwards Pulses, backwards t1 t2 t3 t4 255 ( -1) 10 10 15 245 ( -11) 245 ( -11) 4 5
Pulses, forwards: 11 Pulses, backwards: 0 Resulting value: +11 Pulses, forwards: 0 Pulses, backwards: 15 Resulting value: -15 Pulses, forwards: 5 Pulses, backwards: 1 Resulting value: +4 The difference in pulses at times tn and tn+1 allows you to determine the resulting value and thus the direction of rotation. Establish the following values:
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 109 Operator controls and displays 5.5 Operator controls Number of pulses, forwards At time tn At time tn+1 Number of pulses, backwards At time tn At time tn+1 From this, you determine the resulting value. This is calculated as:
Pulses, forwards, tn+1 Pulses, forwards, tn Pulses, backwards, tn+1
+ Pulses, backwards, tn
= Resulting value Reaction time The bytes "n+4" and "n+5" must be retrieved on the PLC side within a second and cyclically. This ensures that no more than 256 pulses can be added between two scans of the handwheel. For 256 pulses, approximately 4.5 revolutions of the handwheel are required. The rotary pulse encoder supplies a maximum of 200 pulses per second. NOTICE Sample cycle time The input pulses should take effect immediately on the PLC and cause a response in the system. Set a scan cycle 100 ms in the PLC in order to achieve this. See also Direct keys (Page 234) 5.5.4.3 Activation of function key LEDs using system functions Application LEDs are integrated in the HMI device's function keys F1 to F18. The integrated LEDs can be controlled from the PLC. The LEDs can assume the following states:
Off Flashing slowly Flashing quickly 110 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Bit assignment Operator controls and displays 5.5 Operator controls On You can use the LED to signal to the user that a function key should be pressed, in a running project. The following table shows the possible states of the LEDs and the corresponding entries in bit n+1 and bit n of the LED tags. Bit n+1 0 0 1 1 Bit n 0 1 0 1 LED status Off Flashing quickly Flashing slowly ON (continuous) 5.5.4.4 Evaluation of the handwheel with system functions Application The handwheel is an optional operator control of the HMI device. You can enter incremental values in a running project with the handwheel. Note Do not configure limit values in WinCC flexible for tags assigned to the handwheel. Evaluation of the incremental values If the signals of the handwheel are assigned to a WinCC flexible tag, then the forward and backward increments will be set off against each other. The absolute value of the increments is given. The maximum or minimum value of the increments until an overflow depends on the type of tags assigned. A complete handwheel revolution yields 50 pulses. The rotary pulse encoder supplies a maximum of 200 pulses per second. Example The handwheel has a starting value of 120 increments. You rotate the wheel 10 increments forwards and 3 increments backwards. This results in a new value of 127 increments. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 111 Operator controls and displays 5.5 Operator controls 5.5.4.5 Evaluation of the key-operated switch with system functions Application Bit assignment The key-operated switch is an optional operator control of the HMI device. The key-operated switch serves to lock functions in a running project which can be triggered by means of the HMI device. The following table shows the bit assignment for the tag of the key-operated switch:
Bit 1 0 0 1 Bit 0 0 1 0 Key position Central position Turned in clockwise direction up to stop Turned counter-clockwise up to stop Note If you use a tag of the "Boolean" type for the key-operated switch, the following assignment applies:
Status "0": Central position of the key-operated switch Status "1": Key-operated switch turned clockwise or counter-clockwise to the stop 5.5.4.6 Evaluation and activation of the illuminated pushbuttons Application The illuminated pushbuttons are optional operator controls of the HMI device. The integrated LEDs can be controlled from the PLC. The LEDs can assume the following states:
Off Flashing slowly Flashing quickly On You can use the LEDs to signal to the user that a function key should be pressed in a running project. The following table shows the bit assignment for the status tags of the illuminated pushbuttons:
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Bit assignment 112 Operator controls and displays 5.6 Using a memory card with the HMI device Bit 0 0 1 Status of the illuminated pushbutton Pressed Not pressed The following table shows the bit assignment for the LED tags of the illuminated pushbuttons:
Bit n+1 0 0 1 1 Bit n 0 1 0 1 LED status Off Flashing quickly Flashing slowly ON (continuous) 5.6 Using a memory card with the HMI device Introduction The following can be saved to the memory card of the HMI device:
Logs Recipes Operating system Applications Additional specifications The memory card can be inserted and removed during operation. Do not remove the memory card while data is being accessed by an application, for example during backup or recipe transfer. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 113 Operator controls and displays 5.6 Using a memory card with the HMI device Instructions CAUTION Malfunctions If the HMI device is resting on its front, the following can be activated:
The emergency stop button This can bring the system to a standstill unintentionally. The key-operated switch or an illuminated pushbutton This can result in malfunctions. ESD When working in the open housing, ensure that current-carrying conductors do not come into contact with electrical circuits. Note the ESD instructions. CAUTION Possibility of shutdown while logging onto the effective range If the HMI device no longer recognizes the transponder and, therefore, the measuring range, it triggers a shutdown. To remove or insert the memory card, rest the HMI device on its front. Align the HMI device so that it is still possible to measure the distance between the HMI device and the transponder. Distance measurement between HMI device and transponder (Page 61) If possible, log the HMI device off from the effective range. CAUTION Shutdown or rampdown of the system When you insert or remove the memory card, remove the main battery. This failure of the main battery is bridged by the bridge battery, if fitted. The maximum buffer time is 5 minutes. If you do not replace the main battery after 5 minutes, the HMI device will switch off. If the HMI device has been integrated, this will lead to a shutdown or rampdown of the system. Do not exceed the buffer time!
NOTICE Multimedia card The multimedia card of the SIMATIC S7 PLC cannot be used. 114 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Operator controls and displays 5.6 Using a memory card with the HMI device NOTICE Pay attention to cleanliness. Foreign bodies or liquids must not come into contact with the printed circuit board or penetrate the inside of the HMI device. Place the HMI device with the front side facing down on a flat, clean surface to protect against damage. Requirements You have opened the battery compartment of the HMI device The main battery is removed You have opened the connection bay of the HMI device
Slot Memory card symbol Procedure for inserting a memory card Proceed as follows:
1. Insert the memory card into the slot. Pay attention to the memory card symbol when inserting the memory card. An arrow on the memory card indicates the front side and the direction of insertion. When the memory card is correctly inserted into the slot, it stands approx. 3 mm proud of the slot. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 115 Operator controls and displays 5.7 Labeling the function keys Using a memory card for the first time NOTICE Data loss If the HMI device asks you to perform formatting the first time you use a memory card, back up any existing data on the memory card first. Proceed as follows in order to prevent data loss:
1. Cancel the formatting procedure by pressing "ESC". 2. Remove the memory card from the HMI device. 3. Back up any data that you do not want to lose on the memory card. 4. Insert the memory card into the HMI device. 5. Format the memory card on the HMI device. Procedure for unplugging a memory card Proceed as follows:
1. Pull the memory card out of the slot. 2. Close the connection bay. 3. Replace the main battery. 4. Close the HMI device's battery compartment. 5. Store the memory card in a safe place. See also Distance measurement between HMI device and transponder (Page 61) Opening and closing the terminal compartment (Page 71) 5.7 Labeling the function keys Introduction 116 You can label the function keys as required for your project. Use labeling strips to do so. NOTICE Do not write on the keyboard to label the function keys. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Printing labeling strips Operator controls and displays 5.7 Labeling the function keys WinCC flexible comes with a range of labeling strip templates. You will find further information regarding the location of the templates in the WinCC flexible Online Help. Any printable and writable foil can be used as labeling strips. Use transparent foil so that the LEDs of the function keys can be seen. The permitted thickness of the labeling strip is 0.13 mm. Paper should not be used as labeling strips. Labeling strip dimensions
Procedure for attaching the labeling strips The following steps apply for the initial attaching of labeling strips. Proceed as follows:
1. Lay the HMI device on its reverse side. 2. Remove the label from the cover caps. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 117 Operator controls and displays 5.8 Holding the mobile panel and fixing it to the wall
1. Unscrew both cover caps. 2. Pull the labeling strips out of the guides. 3. Inscribe the labeling strips in accordance with the system. Wait for the printed labeling strips to dry before you insert them. 4. Push the labeling strips into the guides. 5. Screw both cover caps back on. Screwed on cover caps with inserted rubber seals satisfy degree of protection IP65. 6. Place the label on to the cover caps. Procedure for exchanging the labeling strips Should the exchange of labeling strips become necessary, these can be reordered. See also Supplementary pack and other accessories (Page 20) 5.8 Holding the mobile panel and fixing it to the wall Holding the HMI device CAUTION Rampdown If the HMI device is logged onto an effective range and more than 5 seconds pass without it recognizing the effective range, the enabling button is deactivated. If a further 25 seconds pass without the HMI device recognizing the effective range, the HMI device triggers a local rampdown. Always align the HMI device towards the transponder. 118 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Operator controls and displays 5.8 Holding the mobile panel and fixing it to the wall The method of holding the HMI device illustrated above enables you, for example, to move around while servicing the system to be monitored. NOTICE Availability of the safety-related operator controls If you are manually controlling potentially dangerous movements in the special operating modes, you must use the above shown forearm holding method. Holding the HMI device so that it is supported on your forearm in this way enables you, for example, to quickly reach the emergency stop button or the enabling button in the event of a dangerous situation. Availability of the enabling button and emergency stop button The HMI device is equally easy to hold for right-handers and left-handers because it is designed symmetrically. The free hand can be used to operate the operator controls on the front side. The hand holding the HMI device can also be used to activate the enabling button. The acknowledgment of the control input is also given if you only press one of the enabling buttons. The enabling button is required to confirm axis movements, for example. The enabling button is optimally accessible. The enabling button triggers a safety shutdown in the event of a panic reaction to danger (release or cramping). The emergency stop button can also be quickly reached with your free hand. Holder for the HMI device NOTICE Operability of the emergency stop button impaired If the HMI device is hooked into an unsuitable wall holder, the operability of the emergency stop button can be impaired. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 119 Operator controls and displays 5.9 Charging station A charging station is available for safe accommodation of the HMI device. The HMI device is used as a stationary HMI device when it is hooked into the charging station. The HMI device's battery is charged in the charging station. 5.9 Charging station 5.9.1 Charging batteries in the charging compartment Introduction You can charge one main battery in each of the two charging compartments of the charging station. The batteries are charged independently of each other. 120 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Operator controls and displays 5.9 Charging station
Locking latch for charging compartment cover Charging compartment LED display Procedure for inserting the battery in the charging compartment Proceed as follows:
1. Pull up the locking latch on the charging compartment cover. The cover can now be opened. 2. Place the battery in the charging compartment. 3. Close the charging compartment. Result The battery is charged automatically whenever the charging station is connected to the power supply unit. The LED display shows the battery's charging status. Procedure for removing the battery from the charging compartment Proceed as follows:
1. Pull up the locking latch on the charging compartment cover. The cover can now be opened. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 121 Operator controls and displays 5.9 Charging station 2. Remove the main battery using the ribbon. 3. Close the charging compartment. 5.9.2 Displays on the charging station Introduction There are 3 LEDs on the charging station. The LEDs show the states of the batteries in the charging compartments and of the power supply unit. Meaning of the LED displays Designation Color Green BAT 1 BAT 2 Green POWER Green/red 122 Meaning The "BAT 1" LED is off when there is no battery in the first charging compartment. The "BAT 1" LED flashes when the battery in the first charging compartment is being charged. The "BAT 1" LED lights up when the battery in the first charging compartment is 95% charged. The "BAT 2" LED is off when there is no battery in the second charging compartment. The "BAT 2" LED flashes when the battery in the second charging compartment is being charged. The "BAT 2" LED lights up when the battery in the second charging compartment is 95% charged. The "POWER" LED is off when there is no voltage supply to the charging station. The "POWER" LED lights up green when the power supply to the charging station is within the nominal range. The "POWER" LED lights up red when there is an overvoltage or undervoltage at the charging station. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Operator controls and displays 5.9 Charging station 5.9.3 Locking the charging station Introduction The lock prevents unauthorized removal of the HMI device from the charging station.
Lock barrel with key Lock Hook for hooking in the HMI device Procedure for locking the charging station Proceed as follows:
1. Slide the lock down to the appropriate cut-out in the charging station. 2. Turn the key by 90 degrees. 3. Remove the key. Result The charging station is locked. You cannot remove the HMI device. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 123 Operator controls and displays 5.9 Charging station Procedure for unlocking the charging station Proceed as follows:
1. Insert the key into the lock barrel. 2. Turn the key by 90 degrees. 3. Slide the lock upwards. Result See also You can now remove the HMI device. Charging station (Page 22) 124 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Configuring the operating system 6.1 Loader Loader The following figure shows the Loader. 6 The buttons on the Loader have the following function:
The "Transfer" button sets the HMI device to transfer mode The transfer mode can only be activated when at least one data channel has been enabled for the transfer. Press the "Start" button to start the project on the HMI device If you do not perform an operation, the project on the HMI device will automatically start after a delay, depending on settings. Press the "Control Panel" button to open the HMI device Control Panel You can change various settings in the Control Panel, for example the transfer settings. Press the "Taskbar" button to activate the taskbar with the Windows CE start menu open The following figure shows the open start menu. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 125 Configuring the operating system 6.1 Loader Open Loader
Symbol for parameter assignment for the WLAN network Symbol for displaying IP information about the LAN connection The following options are available to open the Loader:
The Loader appears briefly after starting the HMI device The Loader appears when the project is closed If configured, use the relevant operating element to close the project. Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there. 126 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Password protection Configuring the operating system 6.1 Loader NOTICE If the password is no longer available, you cannot do the following until you have updated the operating system. Making changes to the Control Panel Operating the Windows CE task bar All data on the HMI device will be overwritten when you update the operating system!
You can protect the Control Panel and taskbar from unauthorized access. When password protection is enabled, the message "password protect" is displayed in the Loader. Password protection prevents maloperations and increases security for the system or machine. If the password is not entered, only the "Transfer" and "Start" buttons are operable. Internet Explorer Internet Explore for Windows CE is installed on the HMI device. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 127 Configuring the operating system 6.2 WLAN Note Internet Explorer for Windows CE and the Internet Explorer version which can run on a PC differ in terms of functionality. For further information, please refer to Microsoft's website. See also Changing password protection (Page 146) Programming the data channel (Page 160) Switching on and testing the HMI device (Page 91) 6.2 WLAN 6.2.1 Overview Introduction The properties of the WLAN networks can be entered in the "WLAN" dialog box. Open the
"WLAN" dialog box in Windows CE. WLAN connection In the case of a WLAN connection, the configuration engineer for the current project can specify the following:
The WLAN networks to which the HMI device connects The configuration engineer can specify up to 3 WLAN networks Priority assignment of WLAN networks Whether the HMI device is permitted to connect with other WLAN networks Procedure You have activated the taskbar in Windows CE and opened the following dialog box with the
"WLAN Settings" or icon. 128 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Configuring the operating system 6.2 WLAN The dialog box shows the parameters of the WLAN connection that are set in the "'WLAN'-
Settings" dialog box in the Control Panel. If you have not yet parameterized the connection, the boxes will be empty. Select the "Details..." button to open a dialog box which provides more detailed information about the established network connection. Set country code NOTICE The correct country setting is essential for operation complying with the approvals. The selection of a country other than the one where you are using the system is subject to criminal penalties. For WLAN communication, the frequency bands are split into channels differently in different countries. 1. Change to the "Country Code" tab. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 129 Configuring the operating system 6.2 WLAN 1. Select the required country code from the "Country Code" selection box. 2. Confirm your entries. The dialog closes. Result The country code for the WLAN connection has been set. Setting the transmission rate for WLAN Use the register "Rate Control" to change the transfer rate of the HMI panel, if necessary. 130 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Configuring the operating system 6.2 WLAN NOTICE Communication not possible. Deselect the "Auto" check box only in case of transfer problems. If you want to change the transfer rate, please contact your network administrator. Communication between HMI Panel and Access Point is not possible in case of incorrect settings. 1. Deselect the "Auto" check box. 2. Select the desired data transfer rate in the Maximum Data Rate selection box. 3. Confirm your entries. 4. Confirm the message of the HMI device. 5. Restart the HMI device. See also Restarting the HMI device (Page 156) 6.2.2 Parameterizing the WLAN connection Introduction Requirements You can define the parameters for the WLAN connection and also create new WLAN connections. icon. You have opened the "WLAN" dialog box, "Wireless" tab, by touching either the "WLAN Settings" icon or the If no connection to a WLAN network exists, all available WLAN networks are listed. If a connection to a WLAN network exists, the following WLAN networks are displayed:
The WLAN network to which the connection exists All parameterized networks Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 131 Configuring the operating system 6.2 WLAN
"Add New" entry Existing and parameterized WLAN networks Status information, shows the WLAN network to which the HMI device is connected Signal strength of the selected network Procedure for creating a WLAN network, parameterize the WLAN network and establish a connection 1. If you want to create a new WLAN network, select "Add New". 2. If you want to configure an existing WLAN network or connect the HMI device to a WLAN network, select the desired network. 3. Use the "Configure" or "Connect" button to open the "Wireless Network Properties" dialog box. 132 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Configuring the operating system 6.2 WLAN Note If the HMI device has detected the WLAN network, the encryption and the authentication process for this network will already be shown in the dialog box. If necessary, you must also enter the appropriate password in the "Network key" text box. After you have entered the password, it is shown in encrypted form. 1. If necessary, select the encryption you are using under "Encryption". 2. If necessary, select the required authentication process under "Authentification". 3. If necessary, enter the password for the WLAN network under "Network key". 4. If necessary, select the type of authentication protocol under "EAP type". 5. Confirm your entries. The dialog closes. The parameterized WLAN network is added to the list of preferred networks. If the HMI device is connected to the WLAN network, the WLAN network is put at the top of the list of preferred networks. Procedure for parameterizing list of preferred networks 1. In the "WLAN" dialog box, "Wireless" tab, press Advanced... to open the "Advanced Wireless Settings" dialog box. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 133 Configuring the operating system 6.2 WLAN 1. If you want to block the connection to the parameterized networks in the list of preferred networks, clear the "Use Windows to configure my wireless settings" check box. Note If preferred networks are configured in the project, the sequence of entries in the list of preferred networks changes when you start a project. The sequence configured in the project is set. Any networks not permitted in the project are removed from the list. The HMI device attempts to connect with a WLAN network in the sequence of the preferred networks in the list. 1. Change the sequence as required. Select the WLAN network you want to move. Use the "Up" and "Down" buttons to select the desired position. 2. If necessary, use the "Delete" button to delete the selected WLAN entry from the list of preferred networks. 3. Select the "Automatically connect to non-preferred networks" check box if you want the HMI device to connect to other WLAN networks. 4. Confirm your entries. The dialog closes. The WLAN parameters are now set. Result Display logbook Press "View Log..." in the "WLAN" dialog box, "Wireless" tab, to open the logbook. The logbook provides information about connection buildup, connection cleardown and failed attempts at connection buildup. 134 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Configuring the operating system 6.3 Control Panel 6.3 Control Panel 6.3.1 Overview Control Panel of the HMI device The HMI device Control Panel can be used to modify the following HMI device settings:
PROFIsafe address Vibration alarm Date/time Screen saver Regional settings Transfer settings Network settings Delay time Password Opening the Control Panel The Control Panel can be opened as follows:
In the startup phase Press "Control Panel" to open the HMI device Control Panel in the Loader. In a running project Select the operating element provided for the respective task, if configured. In the Windows CE start menu Press the Open the Control Panel with "Settings > Control Panel". key on the alphanumeric screen keyboard twice. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 135 1) Icon Configuring the operating system 6.3 Control Panel 6.3.2 Reference Overview of functions The following table shows the settings in the Control Panel. Additional tabs may appear in the "WinCC flexible Internet Settings" dialog. This depends on the options that have been enabled for network operation in the project. Functions Saving and restoring with external storage device Importing, displaying and deleting certificates Setting the date and time Configuring the screen keyboard Changing the browser startup page and general browser settings Changing connection and proxy server settings Changing cookie settings Changing privacy settings Setting the character repeat for the keyboard Setting the double-click Parameterizing the WLAN connection Setting the IP address Setting the name server Parameterizing the LAN connection Setting the IP address Setting the name server Changing the logon data Backup registry information Changing monitor settings Displaying information about the HMI device Restarting the HMI device Calibrating the touch screen
'WLAN' Settings'
'WLAN' Settings'
'LAN' Settings'
'LAN' Settings'
Displaying battery status Activate memory management Tab / entry
"Stores"
"Date/Time"
"General"
Chapter
"Connection"
"Privacy"
"Advanced"
"Repeat"
"Double-Click"
"WLAN"
"IP Address"
"Name Servers"
"LAN"
"IP Address"
"Name Servers"
"Identification"
"Persistent Storage"
"Display"
"Device"
"Device"
"Touch"
"Battery"
Calibrating the touch screen (Page 144) Displaying battery status (Page 181)
"Memory Monitoring" Activate memory management
(Page 182) Activating vibration alarm (Page 159) Activating vibration alarm
"Vibration Alarm"
136 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Functions Changing password protection Changing the printer properties Changing the PROFINET IO setting Setting the PROFIsafe address Changing regional settings Changing the number format Changing the currency format Changing the time format Changing the date format Setting the screen saver Reducing the backlighting Displaying the system information Displaying memory information Icon 1) Configuring the operating system 6.3 Control Panel Tab / entry
"Password Settings" Changing password Chapter
"Regional Settings"
"Number"
"Currency"
"Time"
"Date"
"General"
"Memory"
protection
(Page 146) Changing the printer properties
(Page 154) Enabling PROFINET IO (Page 165) Setting the PROFIsafe address
(Page 164) Changing regional settings (Page 149) Setting the screen saver (Page 152) Displaying system properties
(Page 158) Setting the device name of the HMI device (Page 168) Programming the data channel
(Page 160) Setting the delay time (Page 162) Changing e-mail settings (Page 172) Setting the device name of the HMI device
"Device Name"
Programming the data channel Setting the delay time Changing e-mail settings1)
"Channel"
"Directories"
"Email"
Additional tabs may appear in the "WinCC flexible Internet Settings" dialog. This depends on the options that have been enabled for network operation in the project. 6.3.3 Operating the Control Panel Introduction The Control Panel is operated with the HMI device touch screen. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 137 Configuring the operating system 6.3 Control Panel Procedure Proceed as follows to change settings in the Control Panel:
1. Close the project. Use the provided operating element. The Loader appears 2. Open the Control Panel by pressing "Control Panel". 3. To open the required dialog, double-click its icon. 4. Change as required by touching the tab. 5. Now make the necessary changes. Touch the respective input object to make entries. Use the screen keyboard of the HMI device to enter the new values in the text boxes. Touch a button to operate it. Touch the selection box to open a drop down list box. Touch the required entry from the drop down list box. Touch the check box to select or clear a check box. Touch a radio button to select it. 6. Confirm the entries using the button or terminate the entries using the button
. The dialog closes. 7. Close the Control Panel with the 8. Start the project with the "Start" button in the Loader. button. Input with the screen keyboard A screen keyboard is available for alphanumeric characters. The screen keyboard is displayed as soon as you touch a text box. You can also call up the screen keyboard directly from the Control Panel. Display methods for the screen keyboard You can change the display method for the screen keyboard and fix the position on the screen. Confirm an entry using the key action closes the screen keyboard. Numerical screen keyboard or terminate the entry using the key
. Either Alphanumerical screen keyboard 138 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Configuring the operating system 6.3 Control Panel The alphanumerical screen keyboard has the following levels. Normal level Shift level The shift level includes uppercase letters. Reduced screen keyboard Changing the display of the screen keyboard Key Functions Switching between the numerical and alphanumerical keyboard Switching between the normal level and Shift level of the alphanumerical screen keyboard Switchover to special characters Switching from full display to reduced display Switching from reduced display to full display Closing of reduced display of the screen keyboard Moving the screen keyboard In order to move the screen keyboard, proceed as follows:
1. Touch the icon 2. Touch and move the screen keyboard on the touch screen. 3. When the desired position is reached, release the icon
. Adjust screen keyboard size Note The box you have selected the "Show Resize button" check box. icon only appears on the screen keyboard if in the "Siemens HMI InputPanel" dialog To adjust the size of the screen keyboard, proceed as follows:
1. Touch the icon
. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 139 Configuring the operating system 6.4 Changing settings for operation 2. To adjust the size of the screen keyboard, maintain contact. 3. When the size you want is reached, release contact with the icon. See also Configuring the screen keyboard (Page 140) 6.4 Changing settings for operation 6.4.1 Configuring the screen keyboard Introduction Requirements Procedure 140 You can change the layout and the position of the screen keyboard as follows. You have opened the "Siemens HMI InputPanel - Options" dialog with the "InputPanel"
icon.
Check box for displaying the Button for displaying the screen keyboard Button for saving the screen keyboard settings button in the screen keyboard Proceed as follows:
1. If you want to change the size of the screen keyboard, activate the "Show Resize button"
check box. The icon also appears in the screen keyboard. 2. Use the "Open Input Panel" button to open the screen keyboard. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Configuring the operating system 6.4 Changing settings for operation The appearance of the dialog box changes:
Button for closing the screen keyboard Button for saving the screen keyboard settings 1. If you want to switch between the numeric and alphanumeric screen keyboard, press the key. 2. If you want to change the position of the screen keyboard, move it using the Release contact from the icon when the required position is reached. icon. 3. If you want to increase the size of the screen keyboard, enlarge it to the size required icon. Release contact from the icon when the required size is reached. using the 4. If you want to save the settings, press the "Save" button. 5. Close the screen keyboard by pressing the "Close Input Panel" button. 6. Confirm your entries. The dialog closes. Result See also The screen keyboard settings have been modified. Operating the Control Panel (Page 137) 6.4.2 Setting the character repeat rate of the screen keyboard Introduction Requirements You can set the character repeat for the screen keyboard in the Control Panel. You have opened the "Keyboard Properties" dialog with the "Keyboard"
icon. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 141 Configuring the operating system 6.4 Changing settings for operation
Check box for selecting the character repeat Slider control and buttons for the delay time before character repeat Slider control and buttons for the rate of the character repeat Test box Proceed as follows:
1. If you want to enable character repetition, select the "Enable character repeat" check box. 2. If you want to change the delay, press a button or the slider in the "Repeat delay" group. Moving the slider to the right will shorten the delay. Moving to the left will extend the delay. 3. If you want to change the repeat rate, press a button or the slider in the "Repeat rate"
group. Moving the slider to the right will shorten the repeat rate. Moving to the left will extend the repeat rate. 4. Verify your settings. Touch the test box. The screen keyboard opens. Move the screen keyboard as needed. Touch any character and keep it pressed. Check the implementation of the character repetition and the rate of the character repetition in the test box. Correct your setting if necessary. 5. Confirm your entries. The dialog closes. The character repetition and delay are set. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Procedure Result 142 6.4.3 Setting the double-click Introduction Configuring the operating system 6.4 Changing settings for operation You can start applications in the Control Panel and in Windows CE by double-clicking. In the "Mouse Properties" dialog box you can change the following settings. The time interval between two clicks for a double-click The physical distance between two clicks for a double-click A double-click corresponds to two brief touches in sequence. Requirements You have opened the "Mouse Properties" dialog with the "Mouse"
icon.
Procedure Icon for setting the double-click Icon for testing the double-click Proceed as follows:
1. Double-click on the grid. After one double-click the grid is shown in inverse colors. 2. Double-click on the icon. If the double-click is valid, the icon is displayed as follows:
3. If the icon remains unchanged, double-click on the grid again. 4. Confirm your entries. The dialog closes. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 143 Configuring the operating system 6.4 Changing settings for operation Result The double-click adjustment is completed. 6.4.4 Calibrating the touch screen Introduction Requirements Procedure Depending on the mounting position and viewing angle, it is possible that parallax may occur when operating the touch screen. In order to prevent any operating errors as a result, calibrate the touch screen again in the startup phase or during runtime. You have opened the "OP Properties" dialog box, "Touch" tab, by touching the "OP"
icon. Proceed as follows:
1. Use the "Recalibrate" button to open the following dialog box:
144 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Configuring the operating system 6.4 Changing settings for operation
1. Briefly touch the center of the calibration crosshairs . The calibration crosshairs is then displayed at four more positions. 2. Touch the middle of the calibration crosshairs for each position. If you do not touch the middle of the calibration crosshairs, the procedure is repeated. Once you have touched the calibration crosshairs for all positions, the following dialog appears:
New calibration settings have been measured. Tape the screen to register saved data. Wait for 30 seconds to cancel saved data and keep the current setting. Time limit: 30 sec 1. Touch the screen within 30 seconds. The new calibration is saved. If you wait longer than 30 seconds, the new calibration is discarded and the original calibration remains in effect. The "OP Properties" dialog box, "Touch" tab is displayed again. 2. Close the dialog. Result The HMI device touch screen is now recalibrated. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 145 Configuring the operating system 6.5 Changing password protection 6.5 Changing password protection Introduction Requirements You can protect the Control Panel and the Windows CE taskbar with a password. You have opened the "Password Properties" dialog with the "Password"
icon.
Password text box Text box for entering the password a second time NOTICE If the password is no longer available, you cannot do the following until you have updated the operating system. Making changes to the Control Panel Operating the Windows CE task bar All data on the HMI device will be overwritten when you update the operating system!
Procedure for activating password protection Proceed as follows:
1. Enter a password in the "Password" text box. 2. Repeat the password entry in the "Confirm password" text box. 3. Confirm your entries. The dialog closes. NOTICE The following characters cannot be used in passwords:
Blank Special characters * ? . % / \ ' "
146 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Result Configuring the operating system 6.6 Changing HMI device settings You cannot open the Control Panel or Windows CE taskbar without entering a password. Procedure for deactivating password protection Proceed as follows:
1. Delete the inputs in the "Password" and "Confirm password" text boxes. 2. Confirm your entries. The dialog closes. Result Password protection for the Control Panel and the Windows CE taskbar is disabled. 6.6 Changing HMI device settings 6.6.1 Setting the date and time Introduction Requirements You can set the date and time on the HMI device. The HMI must be restarted in the following cases:
You have changed the time zone setting You have changed the "Daylight savings time currently in effect" check box setting You have opened the "Date/Time Properties" using the "Date/Time Properties"
icon.
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 147 Configuring the operating system 6.6 Changing HMI device settings Procedure Time zone selection box Text box for the time Date selection box
"Daylight savings" check box Button for applying changes Proceed as follows:
1. Select the appropriate time zone for the HMI device from the "Time Zone" selection box. 2. Touch the "Apply" button to confirm your entry. The time of day shown in the "Current Time" box is adjusted correspondingly to the selected time zone. 3. Set the date in the selection box. 4. Set the current time of day in the "Current Time" text box. 5. Touch the "Apply" button to confirm your input. The values you have set are now in effect. Note The system does not automatically switch between winter and summer time. 1. If you want to switch from winter to summer time, select the
"Daylight savings time currently in effect" check box. When you press the "Apply" button, the time is brought forward by one hour. 2. If you want to switch from summer to winter time, clear the
"Daylight savings time currently in effect" check box. When you press the "Apply" button, the time is moved backwards by one hour. 3. Confirm your entries. The dialog closes. Result Internal clock The settings for the data and time of day have now been changed. The HMI device has an internal buffered clock. Synchronizing the date and time with the PLC The date and time of the HMI device can be synchronized with the PLC if this has been configured in the project and the PLC program. Additional information on this subject is available in the "WinCC flexible" system manual. 148 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Configuring the operating system 6.6 Changing HMI device settings NOTICE Time-dependent reactions You have to synchronize the date and time when time-controlled responses are triggered in the PLC by the HMI device. See also Restarting the HMI device (Page 156) 6.6.2 Changing regional settings Introduction Requirements In different countries, for example, the date, time and decimal points are displayed differently. You can adjust the display format to meet the requirements of different regions. The country-specific settings apply to the current project. If the project language is changed, the country-specific settings are also changed. You have opened the "Regional and Language Settings" dialog with the
"Regional Settings"
icon. Procedure Region selection box
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the region from the selection box. 2. Change to the "Number", "Currency", "Time" and "Date" tabs and set the selection boxes to the desired settings. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 149 Configuring the operating system 6.6 Changing HMI device settings 3. Confirm your entries. The dialog closes. Result The HMI device's regional settings have been changed. 6.6.3 Backup registry information Registry information and temporary data You can install and uninstall your own programs on the HMI devices under Windows CE. You must save the registry settings after installation or uninstallation. You can save the following data to the flash memory:
Registry information Temporary files Restoring the file system of a memory card If memory cards are used, the file system on the memory card may become damaged, perhaps due to a power failure. The HMI device detects the defective file system on start-up or when the memory card is inserted. The HMI device can restore the file system automatically or on request. Requirements You have opened the "OP Properties" dialog box, "Persistant Storage" tab, by touching the
"OP"
icon.
Meaning of the text in the dialog:
Saves the current registry information to the flash memory. The HMI device loads the saved registry information the next time it boots. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 150 Procedure Configuring the operating system 6.6 Changing HMI device settings Button for saving registry information Button for saving temporary files Meaning of the text in the dialog:
Saves all the files in temporary storage to the flash memory (for example, from the "Program Files" directory). These files are written back when the HMI device is started. The "\Temp"
directory is not saved. Check box for automatically restoring the file system on the memory card when the HMI device starts up and when a memory card is inserted. Proceed as follows:
1. If you want to save the current registration entries, click the "Save Registry" button. 2. If you want to save the temporary files, click the "Save Files" button. 3. Specify how the file system on the memory card should be restored. Activate automatic restore by selecting the "Automatically Repair ..." check box. If you only want the restore to be carried out upon prompting, clear the
"Automatically Repair ..." check box. 4. Confirm your entries. The dialog closes. Result The desired data is saved. 6.6.4 Changing screen settings Requirements You have opened the "OP Properties" dialog box, "Display" tab, by touching the "OP"
icon.
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 151 Configuring the operating system 6.6 Changing HMI device settings Procedure Button for increasing the brightness Button for reducing the brightness Proceed as follows:
1. If you want to increase the brightness of the screen, press "UP". 2. If you want to reduce the brightness of the screen, press "DOWN". 3. Confirm your entries. The dialog closes. Result The screen settings have been changed. 6.6.5 Setting the screen saver Power management settings in the WinCC flexible project To save power, the HMI device has a power management function with the following states:
"Power Save 1"
Reduces the brightness of the backlighting.
"Power Save 2"
The touch screen is switched off. The function keys are not active. The relevant time intervals are set in the project. Power management is automatically activated if the HMI device is not operated within the specified period of time. You can clear the "Power Save 1" state by touching the touch screen or pressing the function key. You can clear the "Power Save 2" state by briefly pressing the ON/OFF button. Settings in the Control Panel You can also set the following time intervals in the HMI device Control Panel:
For the automatic activation of the screen saver For the automatic reduction in the screen's backlighting The screen saver and the reduced screen backlighting functions are switched back off by means of the following actions:
By pressing any key 152 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Validity Configuring the operating system 6.6 Changing HMI device settings By touching the touch screen The function associated to the key or button will not be executed by this. The time until the backlighting is reduced is always the shorter time interval. In other words,. the time interval set in the "Screensaver" dialog box applies if it is shorter than the setting for "Power Save 1" in the project. If a value of "0" is entered in the "Screensaver" dialog box for the reduction in backlighting, the value set in the project will apply. After you have selected the screen saver and reduction of the backlighting, you must restart the HMI device. The settings become effective following a restart. NOTICE Reducing the brightness of the backlighting The brightness of the backlighting decreases incrementally during its operational life. In order to increase the operational life of the backlighting, activate the backlighting reduction. Burn-in effect Screen contents may occasionally leave a burn-in effect in the background if they appear too long. This burn-in effect will automatically disappear after a certain amount of time if the screensaver is activated, for example. The longer the same content is displayed on the screen, the longer it will take for the burn-in effect to disappear. Generally, you should always activate the screen saver. When the screen saver is active, the backlighting is reduced at the same time. Requirements You have opened the "Screensaver" dialog with the "ScreenSaver"
icon.
Time interval in minutes until backlighting is reduced Period of time in minutes before the screen saver is activated Screen saver setting Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 153 Configuring the operating system 6.6 Changing HMI device settings Procedure Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the interval in minutes after which the backlighting is to be reduced. Entering "0" will deactivate the backlighting reduction. 2. Enter the number of minutes before the screen saver is to be activated. The minimum time is 5 minutes and the maximum time is 71582 minutes. Entering "0" disables the screen saver. 3. Select either the standard screen saver or an empty screen. In order to select the standard screen saver, select the "Standard" option. In order to select a blank screen as screen saver, select the "Blank Screen" option. 4. Confirm your entries. The dialog closes. The screen saver and the reduced backlighting for the HMI device is set. After you have reselected the screen saver and reduction of the backlighting, you must restart the HMI device. The selection becomes effective following a restart. Result See also Power management (Page 98) Restarting the HMI device (Page 156) 6.6.6 Changing the printer properties Introduction Requirements You can print hardcopies and reports on a network printer. Line printing of alarms is not possible on a network printer. The list of current printers and required settings for HMI devices can be found on the Internet under "http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/11376409". You have opened the "Printer Properties" dialog with the "Printer"
icon. 154 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Configuring the operating system 6.6 Changing HMI device settings
Selection boxd for the printer Interface selection box Network address of the printer Paper format selection box
"Orientation" group with radio buttons for print orientation Print quality check box Color printing check box Procedure Proceed as follows:
1. Select the printer from the "Printer Language:" selection box. 2. In the "Port:" selection box, select the "Network:" interface. 3. In the "Network:" text box, enter the network address of the printer. 4. Select the paper format from the"Paper Size:" selection box. 5. Select the required radio button in the "Orientation" group:
"Portrait" for portrait
"Landscape" for landscape 6. Select the print quality. Select the "Draft Mode" check box if you wish to print in draft mode. Clear the "Draft Mode" check box if you wish to print with higher quality. 7. If the printer selected can print in color and you wish it to do so, select the "Color" check box. 8. Confirm your entries. The dialog closes. Result The settings for the printer have now been changed. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 155 Configuring the operating system 6.6 Changing HMI device settings 6.6.7 Restarting the HMI device Introduction The HMI device must be restarted in the following cases:
You have activated or deactivated the PROFINET IO direct keys. You have changed the time zone setting You have switched between summer time and winter time. You have reselected the screen saver and reduction of the backlighting. You have changed the transfer rate to the Access Point. CAUTION Data loss when the HMI device is restarted All volatile data is lost when the HMI device is restarted. Check the following:
The project on the HMI device is complete No data is being written to the flash memory You have opened the "OP Properties" dialog box , "Device" tab, by touching the "OP"
icon.
Button for restarting the HMI device 1. Press "Reboot" to reboot the HMI device. A warning is displayed. Confirm this warning to execute the following:
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Requirements Procedure 156 Result See also Configuring the operating system 6.6 Changing HMI device settings If no projects are active on the HMI device, it will restart immediately. If a project is active on the HMI device, it will output several prompts. After you have acknowledged these prompts, the HMI device will restart. The HMI device starts. Setting the date and time (Page 147) Enabling PROFINET IO (Page 165) Overview (Page 128) 6.6.8 Displaying information about the HMI device Introduction Requirements You will need the device-specific information if you contact A&D Technical Support. You have opened the "OP Properties" dialog box, "Device" tab, by touching the "OP"
icon.
HMI device name Version of the HMI device image Version of the boot loader Boot loader release date Size of the internal flash memory in which the HMI device image and project are stored Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 157 Configuring the operating system 6.6 Changing HMI device settings Procedure Proceed as follows:
1. The device-specific information is displayed in the "Device" tab. 2. Close the dialog when the information is no longer required. Note The memory available for the project is only a part of the internal flash memory displayed. 6.6.9 Displaying system properties Introduction Requirements The system-specific information provides you with information about the processor, operating system and memory of the HMI device. You have opened the "System Properties" dialog with the "System"
icon.
Copyright for Microsoft Windows CE Information about the processor, size of the internal flash memory, and capacity of a memory card when inserted Displaying system properties The system information is displayed. This dialog is read-only. Close the dialog. 158 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Configuring the operating system 6.6 Changing HMI device settings Procedure for displaying memory information NOTICE
"Memory" tab Do not change the memory distribution in the "Memory" tab. Only applies for the usage of options:
An alteration to the memory distribution may be necessary. Please refer to the accompanying documentation for the option for additional information. Proceed as follows:
1. Change to the "Memory" tab. The memory information is displayed. 1. Close the dialog. 6.6.10 Activating vibration alarm Introduction You can activate a vibration alarm for the HMI device. The vibration alarm will be triggered in the current project under the following circumstances:
You leave the effective range with the HMI device without logging the HMI device off from the effective range. The charging status of the main battery is critical. Requirements You have opened the "OP Properties" dialog box, "Vibration Alarm" tab, by touching the
"OP"
icon. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 159 Configuring the operating system 6.7 Programming the data channel Procedure Result 1. Select the "Enable Vibration Alarm" check box. 2. Confirm your entries. The dialog closes. The vibration alarm is activated. 6.7 Programming the data channel Introduction You can only transfer a project if you have enabled at least one data channel. If you block all data channels, the HMI device is protected against unintentional overwriting of the project data and HMI device image. Note Data channel 1 is not available with the Mobile Panel 277 Wireless. Requirements The "Transfer Settings" dialog box has been opened using the "Transfer Settings"
icon. 160 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Configuring the operating system 6.7 Programming the data channel
Group for the data channel 2 (Channel 2) Button for the "Network and Dial-Up Connections" dialog box Procedure Proceed as follows:
1. Select the desired interface from the selection box. Note
"ETHERNET" is for communication via LAN and WLAN. 1. If you want to enable the data channel, select the "Enable Channel" check box. 2. If you want to disable the data channel, clear the "Enable Channel" check box. 3. If you want to enable automatic transfer, select the "Remote Control" check box. 4. Enter further parameters if required. Applies to "ETHERNET"
Press "Advanced" to change to "Network and Dial-Up Connections". Open the "LAN"or "WLAN" entry. You can change the TCP/IP settings there. Confirm your entries. Close "Network and Dial-Up Connections". Applies to "USB"
No further settings are required for "USB". 5. Confirm your entries. The dialog closes. Result The data channel is programmed. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 161 Configuring the operating system 6.8 Setting the delay time General information Note Changes during "Transfer" mode If changes are made to the transfer settings when the HMI device is in "Transfer" mode or while a project is running, the new settings will only take effect the next time a transfer or the project is started. This may occur if the Control Panel is opened to change the transfer properties in an active project. NOTICE Transfer mode via channel 2 You can change the settings for the transfer. The following steps are required:
Close the project. Change the settings on the HMI device. Then return to "Transfer" mode. See also Changing the network configuration (Page 169) 6.8 Setting the delay time Introduction Requirements The project is opened following a delay time when the HMI device is switched on. The Loader is displayed during the delay time. You have opened the "Transfer Settings" dialog box, "Directories" tab, by touching the
"Transfer"
icon. 162 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Configuring the operating system 6.8 Setting the delay time
Directory where the project file is saved Directory where the compressed source file of your project is saved The external memory card or the network connection can be defined as the storage location. During the next backup process, the project's source file is stored in the specified location. Memory location and start file of the HMI device for the executable project file Delay time selection box NOTICE Settings under "Project File" and "Path"
Do not change the setting in the "Project File" and "Path:" boxes. The project may not open at the next start of the HMI device if changes are made here. Procedure for setting the delay time 1. Select the desired delay time in seconds from the "Wait [sec]:" selection box. With the value "0", the project starts immediately. It is now no longer possible to call the Loader after switching on the HMI device. If you still do need to access the Loader an operating element must be configured to close the project. 2. Confirm your entries. The dialog closes. Result The delay time for the HMI device is now set. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 163 Configuring the operating system 6.9 Setting the PROFIsafe address 6.9 Setting the PROFIsafe address PROFIsafe address Each participant in PROFIsafe communication has a unique PROFIsafe address. This address is used to send safety message frames between the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN and the F CPU. Note Assign the HMI device a PROFIsafe address that is unique within the relevant network segment. Validity of the PROFIsafe address The PROFIsafe address can be parameterized at the following stages:
In the HMI device Control Panel In the WinCC flexible project The PROFIsafe address that the HMI device loads depends on the parameterization in the Control Panel. If a valid PROFIsafe address has been parameterized in the Control Panel:
The HMI device loads the PROFIsafe address set in the Control Panel. If a valid PROFIsafe address has not been parameterized in the Control Panel:
The HMI device loads the PROFIsafe address set in the project. Note The invalid address 65,535 is parameterized by default in the Control Panel of the HMI device. The HMI device loads the address set in the project. NOTICE No integration in PROFIsafe communication To ensure that the HMI device can be integrated in PROFIsafe communication, the following addresses must match:
The PROFIsafe address configured in HW Config by STEP 7 The PROFIsafe address set in the "PROFIsafe" dialog box Requirements You have opened the "PROFIsafe" dialog with the "PROFIsafe"
icon. 164 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01
1 2 3 | UserMan2 | Users Manual | 1.79 MiB |
Procedure Configuring the operating system 6.10 Enabling PROFINET IO Proceed as follows:
1. If you wish the HMI device to load the PROFIsafe address set in the Control Panel, enter a value between 1 and 65,534 in the "Address:" text box. 2. If you wish the HMI device to load the PROFIsafe address set in the project, enter a value between the invalid PROFIsafe address 65,535 in the "Address:" text box. Result The PROFIsafe address is set. 6.10 Enabling PROFINET IO PROFINET IO Requirements Function keys or buttons can be configured as PROFINET IO direct keys. If PROFINET IO direct keys are used in the project, they must be enabled. You have opened the "PROFINET" dialog with the "PROFINET"
icon.
Check box to enable or block PROFINET IO direct keys Group for communications link Text box for the device name Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 165 Configuring the operating system 6.10 Enabling PROFINET IO MAC address of the LAN interface MAC address of the WLAN interface Procedure Result See also 1. To enable PROFINET IO direct keys, select the "PROFINET IO enabled" check box. 2. Select the communications link. Note Select "LAN" for service purposes only. If you select "LAN", the HMI device is connected directly to the network via the RJ45 interface. If you connect the configuring PC directly to the HMI device through the RJ45 interface, you must open the connection compartment. If the connection bay is open, degree of protection IP 65 is not fulfilled. 1. Enter the device name of the HMI device. The device name can have a maximum of 240 characters. NOTICE Addressing error of PROFINET IO device The device name does not correspond to the computer name in Windows CE. The device name must match the device name entered in the HW Config of STEP 7. 1. Confirm your entries. The dialog closes. 2. Reboot the HMI device after saving the settings. The PROFINET IO direct keys are enabled. Restarting the HMI device (Page 156) Direct keys (Page 234) Required properties of the WLAN connection (Page 57) 166 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Configuring the operating system 6.11 Configuring network operation 6.11 Configuring network operation 6.11.1 Overview of network operation Introduction You connect the HMI device to a PROFINET network. The connection to a network offers, for example, the following options:
Printing via a network printer Saving, exporting and importing of recipe data records on or from a server Setting up of message and data archives Transferring a project Saving data NOTICE The HMI device can only be used in PROFINET networks. The HMI device only has client functionality in the PC network. This means that users can access files of a node with TCP/IP server functionality from the HMI device via the network. However, you cannot, for example, access data on the HMI device from a PC via the network. Note Information on communication using SIMATIC S7 via PROFINET is provided in the
"WinCC flexible communication" user manual. Addressing Within a PROFINET network, computers are usually addressed using device names. These device names are translated from a DNS or WINS server to TCP/IP addresses. The corresponding servers are generally available in PROFINET networks. Note The use of TCP/IP addresses to address PCs is not supported by the HMI device's operating system. So to address the HMI device using device names in a PROFINET network, you need a DNS or WINS server. Consult your network administrator if you have questions in this regard Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 167 Configuring the operating system 6.11 Configuring network operation Printing via a network printer The HMI device's operating system does not support line by line alarm logging via a network printer. All other printing functions, for example hardcopy or logs are available without restriction via the network. Preparation Before beginning the configuration, request the following network parameters from your network administrator. Does the network use DHCP for dynamic assignment of network addresses?
If not, get a new TCP/IP network address for the HMI device. Which TCP/IP address does the default gateway have?
If a DNS network is used, what are the addresses of the name server?
If a WINS network is used, what are the addresses of the name server?
General procedure for configuring the network The HMI device must be configured prior to network operation. The configuration is basically divided into the following steps:
Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the device name of the HMI device. 2. Configure the network address. 3. Set the logon information. 4. Save the settings. 6.11.2 Setting the device name of the HMI device Introduction Requirements The HMI device uses the device name to identify itself in the network. You have opened the "System Properties" dialog with the "System"
icon. 168 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Configuring the operating system 6.11 Configuring network operation
Device name of the HMI device Description for the HMI device (optional) Note To activate the network functions, enter a unique device name in the Device name text box. Procedure Result See also Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the device name for the HMI device in the "Device name:" text box. 2. If necessary, enter a description for the HMI device in the "Device description:" text box. 3. Confirm your entries. The dialog closes. The device name for the HMI device is now set. Overview of network operation (Page 167) 6.11.3 Changing the network configuration Introduction You can change the network settings for the WLAN and LAN connection under "Network and Dial-Up Connections". Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 169 Configuring the operating system 6.11 Configuring network operation Requirements for changing WLAN or LAN connection settings You have opened the following display by touching the "Network and Dial-Up Connections"
icon. You can enter the connection parameters for the WLAN and LAN connection. The parameterization is identical. Procedure for setting the connection parameters The following procedure shows how to set the connection parameters using the WLAN connection. Proceed as follows:
1. Open the "WLAN" entry. The "''WLAN' Settings" dialog box opens. 170 1. Select either automatic address assignment via DHCP or manual address assignment. 2. If you assign the address manually, enter the corresponding addresses in the text boxes for "IP Address", "Subnet Mask" and, if used, "Default Gateway". 3. If a name server is used in the network, change to the "Name Servers" tab. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Configuring the operating system 6.11 Configuring network operation 1. Enter the appropriate addresses. 2. Confirm your entries. The dialog closes. 3. Close the "Network and Dial-Up Connections" display. The Control Panel is displayed again. The WLAN / LAN connection parameters for the HMI device have been set. Result See also Overview of network operation (Page 167) 6.11.4 Changing the logon data Introduction Requirements Procedure In order to access certain network resources you need to log on to the network as a user. Your administrator will issue you with a user name and password and the name of the domain. You have opened the "Network ID" dialog with the "Network ID"
icon. Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the user name in the "User name" text box. 2. Enter your password in the "Password" text box. 3. Enter the domain name in the "Domain" text box. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 171 Configuring the operating system 6.11 Configuring network operation 4. Confirm your entries. The dialog closes. The logon data has now been set. Overview of network operation (Page 167) Result See also 6.11.5 Changing e-mail settings Requirements You have opened the "WinCC flexible Internet Settings" dialog with the
"WinCC Internet Settings"
icon.
Setting the SMTP server Name for the sender E-mail account Note Options Additional tabs may appear in the "WinCC flexible Internet Settings" dialog. This depends on the options that have been enabled for network operation in the project. Procedure for changing e-mail settings Proceed as follows:
172 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Configuring the operating system 6.12 Changing internet settings 1. Specify the SMTP server. Select the "Use the default of the project file" option button if you want to use the SMTP server configured in the project. Clear the "Use the default of the project file" option button if you do not want to use the SMTP server configured in the project. Specify the required SMTP server. 2. Enter the name for the sender in the "Sender" text box. 3. Enter the e-mail account for your e-mail in the "Authentication:" text box. Some e-mail providers only allow you to send mail if you specify the e-mail account. The
"Authentication:" text box can remain empty if your e-mail provider allows you to send mail without checking the account. 4. Confirm your entries. The dialog closes. Result See also The e-mail settings have been changed. Overview of network operation (Page 167) 6.12 Changing internet settings 6.12.1 Changing internet settings Requirements You have opened the "Internet Options" dialog box, "General" tab, by touching the
"Internet Options"
icon. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 173 Configuring the operating system 6.12 Changing internet settings Note Do not change the settings in the "User Agent" box. Procedure Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the homepage for the Internet browser in the "Start Page" text box. 2. Enter the address of the required search engine in the "Search Page" text box. 3. Enter the required cache memory size in the "Cache" text box. 4. If you want to delete the cache memory, press the "Clear Cache" button. 5. If you want to delete the history, press the "Clear History" button. 6. Confirm your entries. The dialog closes. Result The general parameters for the Internet browser have been set. 6.12.2 Setting the proxy server Requirements You have opened the "Internet Options" dialog box, "Connection" tab, by touching the
"Internet Options"
icon. Procedure 174 Proceed as follows:
1. Select the "Use LAN (no autodial)" check box. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Configuring the operating system 6.12 Changing internet settings 2. If you are using a proxy server, in the "Network" group, select the
"Access the Internet using a proxy server" check box. Specify the address of the proxy server and the interface. 3. If you want to bypass the proxy server for local addresses, select the
"Bypass proxy server for local addresses" check box. 4. Confirm your entries. The dialog closes. 6.12.3 Changing data protection settings Cookies and encryption Cookies are pieces of information sent by a web server to a browser. In the event of subsequent access to the web server, the cookies are sent back. This enables information to be stored between the accesses. In order to ensure a high level of privacy, data are sent via the Internet in encrypted form. Common encryption protocols include SSL and TLS. You can activate or deactivate the usage of encryption protocols. The required settings can be obtained from your network administrator. Requirements You have opened the "Internet Options" dialog box, "Privacy" tab, by touching the
"Internet Options"
icon. Procedure Proceed as follows:
1. Select the required cookie behavior by means of the radio buttons.
"Accept"
Cookies are stored without request.
"Block"
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 175 Configuring the operating system 6.12 Changing internet settings Cookies will not be stored.
"Prompt"
Cookies will be stored on request. 2. If you want allow cookies which are restricted to a single session, select the
"Always allow session cookies" check box. 3. Change to the "Advanced" tab. Result 1. Activate the required encryption protocol. 2. Confirm your entries. The dialog closes. The safety settings have now been set. 6.12.4 Importing and deleting certificates Overview Requirements You can import, view and delete certificates. The certificates differ in the following ways:
Certificates that you trust Own certificates Other certificates The required settings can be obtained from your network administrator. You have opened the "Certificates" dialog with the "Certificates"
icon. 176 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Procedure Configuring the operating system 6.13 Backing up and restoring with an external memory medium Proceed as follows:
1. Select the type of certificate from the selection box:
"Trusted Authorities"
"My Certificates"
"Other Certificates"
2. If required, start the importing process with the "Import.." button. A dialog with source details will open. 3. If required, delete the certificate. Mark the desired certificate. Delete the selected certificate using the "Remove" button. 4. The "View.." button enables you to list the properties of the selected certificate. 5. Close the dialog. Result The changes to the certificates have been carried out. 6.13 Backing up and restoring with an external memory medium Backup During a backup, the following data is copied from the HMI device's internal flash memory to an external memory medium. Operating system Applications Data The following external storage devices are possible:
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 177 Configuring the operating system 6.13 Backing up and restoring with an external memory medium Memory card USB memory stick CAUTION IP65 degree of protection not fulfilled To insert or remove the memory card, you must open the HMI device's connection compartment. If the connection bay is open, degree of protection IP 65 is not fulfilled. It is preferable to back up onto a USB memory stick. Requirements for backup The current project and all other applications are closed, except Control Panel. The HMI device features an external storage device with sufficient free space. The size of the internal flash memory is displayed with information about the HMI device. If the available space on the external memory medium is insufficient, a warning is displayed and backup is aborted. You have opened the "Backup/Restore" dialog with the "Backup/Restore"
icon. Procedure for backup Proceed as follows:
1. Select "BACKUP" to start Backup. The HMI device checks the external memory. The HMI device issues messages in the following situations:
More than one external memory is available:
Select the desired memory. The external memory is not available or is defective:
Acknowledge the displayed messages. The Control Panel is displayed again. Replace the external memory. Start the backup process again. 178 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Configuring the operating system 6.13 Backing up and restoring with an external memory medium Data is already stored on the external memory. 2. Follow the instructions of the HMI device. The following messages are displayed in sequence during backup:
"Checking Registry"
"Backup Progress"
"Saving CE-Image"
A progress bar shows the status of the backup process. If backup was successful, the following message is displayed:
"Backup successfully completed. Press OK and remove your storage card."
3. Click "OK" button to acknowledge the message. Remove the external memory medium. Result The HMI device data is now saved on the external memory. Requirements for restoring The HMI device features an external memory medium that stores the backup. Procedure for restoring NOTICE Deleting the flash memory A restore operation deletes the old data from flash memory of the HMI device on confirmation. The data stored on the external memory is then copied to the internal flash memory. Existing license keys are deleted following your confirmation. The restore process involves the following steps:
The Windows CE image is restored. The HMI device starts. All other data is restored. NOTICE Cancel restore If the external memory is removed during the restore process, the process is canceled. Ensure that the external memory is not removed at any point during the restore process. Proceed as follows:
1. Select "RESTORE" to start Restore. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 179 Configuring the operating system 6.13 Backing up and restoring with an external memory medium The HMI device checks the external memory. The HMI device issues messages in the following situations:
The external memory is not available or is defective:
Acknowledge the displayed messages. The Control Panel is displayed again. Replace the external memory. More than one external memory with valid backup is available:
Remove all external memories with backups that are not needed. If necessary, you can check the available external memories using the "REFRESH"
button. 2. If necessary, start the restore process with the "RESTORE" button. The data to be restored is checked. When the check is complete, one of the following prompts is displayed:
"You are starting RESTORE now. All files (except files on storage cards) and the registry will be erased. Are you sure?"
At this point you can cancel the restore using the "No" button to prevent the data on the HMI device from being deleted. You are now starting RESTORE. All files on the panel and the licenses listed below as well as the registry will be erased. Are you sure?
This query is displayed when license keys are available both on the HMI device and in the backup data. If necessary, cancel the restore process with the "No" button and first back up the HMI device's license keys. Then restart the restore process. 3. Start to restore the data by selecting "Yes". A progress bar shows the status of the restoration of the Windows CE image. When restore is completed, the following message is displayed:
"Restore succesfully finished. Press ok, remove your storage card and reboot your device."
4. Remove the external memory. 5. Acknowledge this message. The HMI device starts. Result 180 The backed-up data has been restored to the HMI device. Note Calibrating the touch screen After the restore, you may have to re-calibrate the touch screen. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 See also Displaying information about the HMI device (Page 157) Using a memory card with the HMI device (Page 113) Configuring the operating system 6.14 Displaying battery status 6.14 Displaying battery status Introduction You can check the charging status and the temperature of the main battery and the bridging battery. NOTICE Battery cannot be charged To charge the batteries, the ambient temperature / battery temperature must not exceed 40 C The higher the temperature, the longer it will take for the battery to charge. Find a place with a cool ambient temperature for the charging station. If necessary, allow the battery to cool first. Requirements You have opened the "OP Properties" dialog box, "Battery" tab, by touching the "OP"
icon.
Charging status of main battery Temperature of main battery Charging status of bridging battery Temperature of bridging battery Button to update the display Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 181 Configuring the operating system 6.15 Activate memory management Procedure Proceed as follows:
1. Update the display if required by pressing the "Update" button. 2. Close the dialog. 6.15 Activate memory management Memory management Provided the memory management is activated, the HMI device will automatically close the project if the memory needs reorganizing during an active project. The project is shut down and the HMI device will display a message. You have to restart the project. NOTICE Memory management If you do not activate memory management, undefined states can occur during the runtime of the project. Select memory management in the "OP Properties" dialog box. Requirements You have opened the "OP Properties" dialog box, "Memory Monitoring" tab, by touching the
"OP"
icon.
The maximum used memory since last power on of the HMI device and the current used memory in percent. Check box for selecting memory management Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 182 Procedure Configuring the operating system 6.15 Activate memory management Proceed as follows:
1. In order to start memory management, select the check box. 2. Confirm your entries. The dialog closes. Result Memory management is activated. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 183 Commissioning the HMI device 7.1 Overview Operating the HMI device 7 The HMI device is operated in the system as follows:
As mobile device, with a battery As stationary device, in the charging station For transfer and testing purposes, you can operate the HMI device in an office environment as follows:
As mobile device, with a battery As stationary device, with a tabletop power supply unit As stationary device, in the charging station HMI device commissioning requirements You must take the following steps before commissioning a project on the HMI device:
1. Install and connect up charging station Alternatively, connect the HMI device to the tabletop power supply unit. 2. Charging the battery and inserting it in the HMI device To charge the battery, you have the following possibilities:
In the charging compartment of the charging station In the HMI device, in the charging station In the HMI device when connected to the tabletop power supply unit 3. Switch on the HMI device with the ON/OFF button 4. Commission and test WLAN 5. Define the settings for the transfer in the Control Panel. 6. Transfer project to the HMI device Commissioning Start the project once you have transferred it to the HMI device. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 185 Commissioning the HMI device 7.2 Operating modes Note If the project contains effective ranges, you must perform an acceptance test for the effective ranges and transponders. You can only start the project on the HMI device once the acceptance test is complete. If necessary: Testing zones See also Mounting the charging station (Page 66) Connection of the charging station to the power supply (Page 70) Programming the data channel (Page 160) Acceptance of the system (Page 196) 7.2 Operating modes Operating modes The HMI device may be in the following operating modes:
Offline Online Transfer
"Offline mode" and "Online mode" can be set on both the configuring PC and the HMI device. To set these modes on the HMI device, use a corresponding operating element of the project. Changing the operating mode The configuration engineer must have configured an appropriate operating element to allow a change of the operating mode on the HMI device during ongoing operation. Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there.
"Offline" operating mode In this operating mode, the HMI device and the PLC do not communicate via the connections configured in the WinCC flexible project. You can operate the current project on the HMI device, but the project data will not be transferred. 186 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Commissioning the HMI device 7.3 Using existing projects Note Emergency stop button active In "Offline" mode, the emergency stop button is active when the following requirements are met:
The HMI device is in an area with sufficient WLAN coverage. The HMI device is integrated in the safety program of the CPU.
"Online" operating mode In this mode, the HMI device and PLC communicate. You can operate the plant on the HMI device according to your system configuration.
"Transfer" mode In this mode, you can transfer a project from the configuring PC to the HMI device or backup and restore HMI device data, for example. The following options are available for setting "Transfer" mode on the HMI device:
When the HMI device starts up Start "Transfer" mode manually in the HMI device Loader. During ongoing operation Start the "Transfer" mode manually within the project using an operating element. With automatic transfer, following a prompt the HMI device toggles to "Transfer" mode when a transfer is initiated on the configuring PC. 7.3 Using existing projects Note Safety-related operator controls The behavior and possible fields of application of the enabling button and emergency stop button on the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN are different from those of its predecessors, which do not have Safety Integrated functions. In this respect, you cannot reuse existing control programs. For additional information on the safety-related operator controls, refer to the section titled
"Particular features of fail-safe operation" and the Function manual "Fail-safe operation of the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN". You can reuse WinCC flexible projects for the following HMI devices:
Mobile Panel 177 PN Mobile Panel 177 DP Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 187 Commissioning the HMI device 7.4 Data transmission options Mobile Panel 277 Carry out an HMI device switch in WinCC flexible. Adaptations You must adapt the following aspects of the WinCC flexible project:
Communication via WLAN Zone recognition and point recognition If you have used point detection with box ID in an existing project, you have the following option:
Instead of using the connection box, use a zone consisting of at least one transponder and set the previous box ID as the ID in this zone. If you are using zone recognition, you will need one or more transponders for one zone. In WinCC flexible, you can parameterize zones in "Device settings". You can use zones to configure an easy way of selecting a zone-specific screen. In this case you may also need to modify the control program from previous devices. Additional information on this subject can be found in the WinCC flexible online help or in the
"WinCC flexible migration" user manual. 7.4 Data transmission options Overview The following table shows the options for data transfer between Mobile Panel 277 Wireless and a configuring PC. The Ethernet data channel is used for communication via WLAN and LAN (RJ45). Type Backup Restoring Updating the operating system Updating the operating system with reset to factory settings Transferring a project Installing or removing an option Data channel USB Ethernet USB Ethernet USB Ethernet USB Ethernet via the RJ 45 interface USB Ethernet USB Mobile Panel 277 Wireless Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes 188 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Commissioning the HMI device 7.5 Preparing and backing up a project Type License key transferring or transferring back Data channel Ethernet USB Ethernet Mobile Panel 277 Wireless Yes Yes Yes 7.5 Preparing and backing up a project 7.5.1 Overview Introduction In order to operate the system with the HMI device, you must transfer the WinCC flexible project to the HMI device. Transferring the project to the HMI device You can transfer a project to an HMI device as follows:
Transfer from the configuring PC Restore from a PC using ProSave In this case, an archived project is transferred from a PC to the HMI device. WinCC flexible need not be installed on this PC. Commissioning and recommissioning When the HMI device is commissioned there is no project at first. The HMI device is also in this state after the operating system has been updated. When recommissioning, any project already on the HMI device is replaced. See also Operating modes (Page 186) Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 189 Commissioning the HMI device 7.5 Preparing and backing up a project 7.5.2 Transfer 7.5.2.1 Overview Transfer At the end of the configuration phase, transfer the executable project from the configuring PC to the HMI device. You can start the "Transfer" mode manually or automatically on the HMI device. Transferred data is written directly to the internal flash memory on the HMI device. For the transfer, you use a data channel which you have to configure before starting a transfer. Backtransfer You have the option to transfer the compressed project file together with the runtime project to the HMI device. If necessary, the compressed project file can be transferred back to the configuring PC and edited. The HMI device must be equipped with an external memory to which the compressed project file can be saved. NOTICE No checking of the project files WinCC flexible does not check whether the compressed project file stored on the HMI device corresponds to the existing runtime project. 7.5.2.2 Starting manual transfer Introduction Requirements You can manually switch the HMI device to "Transfer" mode as follows:
With a configured operating element during ongoing operation In the Loader of the HMI device The project "*.hmi" that you want to transfer is open in WinCC flexible on the configuring PC The HMI device is connected to this configuring PC The data channel is programmed on the HMI device The HMI device is in "Transfer" mode 190 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Commissioning the HMI device 7.5 Preparing and backing up a project Proceed as follows:
1. On the configuring PC, select the "Transfer settings" command in the menu "Project >
Transfer" in WinCC flexible. The "Select devices for transfer" dialog opens. 2. Select the HMI device in the left area of the dialog. 3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC. 4. Set the connection parameters. 5. Set the transfer parameters in the right area of the dialog. 6. If you wish to transfer the compressed project file together with the executable project to the HMI device:
Select the "Enable backtransfer" check box. 7. Start transfer in WinCC flexible with "Transfer". The configuring PC checks the connection to the HMI device. The project is transferred to the HMI device. If the connection is not available or is defective, an error message is displayed on the configuring PC. When the transfer is completed successfully, the project can be found on the HMI device. The transferred project is then started automatically. Procedure Result See also Operating modes (Page 186) Data transmission options (Page 188) Programming the data channel (Page 160) 7.5.2.3 Starting automatic transfer Introduction If automatic transfer is selected, the HMI device automatically switches to "Transfer" mode during operation as soon as a transfer is initiated on the connected configuring PC. Note The HMI device only switches to "Transfer" mode in the current project. Automatic transfer is particularly suited for the test phase of a new project since transfer is completed without interfering with the HMI device. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 191 Commissioning the HMI device 7.5 Preparing and backing up a project NOTICE Undesired system responses If automatic transfer has been selected on the HMI device and a transfer is then initiated on the configuring PC, the current project is automatically terminated following a prompt. The HMI device then automatically switches to "Transfer" mode. The transfer mode can trigger undesired responses in the system. After the commissioning phase, deactivate the automatic transfer so that the HMI device cannot be inadvertently switched to transfer mode. You can issue a password in the Control Panel to restrict access to the transfer settings and thus avoid unauthorized modifications. Requirements Procedure The project "*.hmi" that you want to transfer is open in WinCC flexible on the configuring PC The HMI device is connected to this configuring PC The data channel is programmed on the HMI device The automatic transfer is activated in the data channel for the transfer The project is started on the HMI device Proceed as follows:
1. On the configuring PC, select the "Transfer settings" command in the menu "Project >
Transfer" in WinCC flexible. The "Select devices for transfer" dialog opens. 2. Select the HMI device in the left area of the dialog. 3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC. 4. Set the connection parameters. 5. Set the transfer parameters in the right area of the dialog. 6. If you wish to transfer the compressed project file together with the executable project to the HMI device:
Select the "Enable backtransfer" check box. 7. Start transfer in WinCC flexible with "Transfer". The configuring PC checks the connection to the HMI device. If the HMI device is integrated, it displays the "Start removal" dialog box. 8. Press one of the enabling buttons to confirm the dialog box. The HMI device is removed. The current project is terminated. The HMI device then automatically switches to transfer mode. The project is transferred to the HMI device. If 192 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Commissioning the HMI device 7.5 Preparing and backing up a project the connection is not available or is defective, an error message is displayed on the configuring PC. When the transfer is completed successfully, the project can be found on the HMI device. The transferred project is then started automatically. Result See also Operating modes (Page 186) Data transmission options (Page 188) Programming the data channel (Page 160) 7.5.2.4 Starting backtransfer Requirements Procedure No project is open on the configuring PC in WinCC flexible The HMI device is connected to this configuring PC The data channel is programmed on the HMI device The HMI device is in "Transfer" mode The memory card containing the compressed project file is inserted into the HMI device Proceed as follows:
1. On the configuring PC, select the "Communication settings" command in the menu
"Project > Transfer" in WinCC flexible. The "Communication settings" dialog box opens. 2. Select the type of HMI device. 3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC. 4. Set the connection parameters. 5. Close the dialog with "OK". 6. Select the "Transfer" > "Backtransfer" command in the "Project" menu. The "Backtransfer" dialog opens. 7. Click "OK" to start the backtransfer process. The configuring PC checks the connection to the HMI device. The compressed project file is transferred back from the HMI device to the configuring PC. If the connection is not available or is defective, an error message is displayed on the configuring PC. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 193 Commissioning the HMI device 7.5 Preparing and backing up a project Result See also After successful backtransfer, the project is opened on the configuring PC in WinCC flexible. Operating modes (Page 186) Data transmission options (Page 188) Programming the data channel (Page 160) 7.5.3 Testing a project Introduction There are two options to test a project:
Test the project on the configuring PC You can test a project at a configuring PC, using a simulator. For detailed information, refer to the "WinCC flexible" user manual and to the WinCC flexible online help. Offline testing of the project on the HMI device Offline testing means that communication between the HMI device and PLC connections, which have been configured in WinCC flexible, is down while the test is being carried out. The PROFIsafe connection between the HMI device and PLC is also available in "Offline"
mode. Online testing of the project on the HMI device Online testing means that the HMI device and PLC communicate with each other during testing. Perform the tests, starting with the "Offline test", followed by the "Online test". Note You should always test the project on the HMI device on which the project will be used. Check the following:
1. WLAN coverage 2. Zone recognition, if zones have been configured 3. Check the correct layout of the screens 4. Check the screen navigation 5. Check the input objects 6. Enter the tag values The test increases the certainty that the project will run error-free on the HMI device. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 194 Commissioning the HMI device 7.5 Preparing and backing up a project Note Test without effective ranges Perform the test without effective ranges. A system acceptance test must be performed as soon as you have configured effective ranges in your project. The effective ranges and assigned transponders will be tested as part of the acceptance test. Test the effective ranges separately. Requirements for offline testing The project has been transferred to the HMI device The HMI device is in "Offline" mode. Procedure In "Offline" mode, you can test individual project functions on the HMI device without them being affected by the PLC. PLC tags, therefore, are not updated. Test the operating elements and visualization of the project as far as possible without connecting to the PLC. Requirements for online testing The project has been transferred to the HMI device The HMI device is in "Online" mode Procedure See also In "Online" mode, you can test individual project functions on the HMI device without them being affected by the PLC. PLC tags are updated in this case. You have the option to test all communication-dependent functions, for example alarms, etc. Test the operating elements and views of the project. Acceptance of the system (Page 196) Testing zones (Page 200) Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 195 Commissioning the HMI device 7.5 Preparing and backing up a project 7.5.4 Acceptance of the system 7.5.4.1 Overview Introduction The acceptance of the system includes the following areas:
Configuring the F CPU and fail-safe I/O Safety program Effective ranges and transponders Acceptance steps that you must execute in order to operate the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN HMI device in a system with effective ranges are described in detail in these operating instructions. The following manuals contain more detailed notes on acceptance of the system:
Function manual "Fail-safe operation of the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN"
Manual "S7 distributed safety, configuring and programming", Chapter "System acceptance test". Acceptance of the effective ranges and transponders For acceptance of the effective ranges and transponders you must determine a CRC checksum in the plant and enter it in the project. After subsequent project transfer to the HMI device you can operate the plant with the HMI device. Note If you change transponders in the plant you must execute another acceptance of the plant. When executing an acceptance test of the system, all of the relevant application-specific standards must be observed. 7.5.4.2 Accepting effective ranges and transponders Introduction For safe operation, the project of the HMI device must precisely match the plant. For this reason when first starting a project in the plant, you must verify all effective ranges with all transponders. The result of the verification is a CRC checksum that you must enter in the project. Then you must transfer the project to the HMI device again. Note Transponders that are exclusively assigned to one zone are not considered in this verification. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 196 Acceptance if there are changes Commissioning the HMI device 7.5 Preparing and backing up a project If you change the configuration of transponders and effective ranges in the system, then you must adjust the configuration. Then you must accept the effective ranges and transponders again. Requirements In the project:
Effective ranges and transponders must be configured in the project. The project has been transferred to the HMI device. In the plant:
The transponders must be mounted in the plant in such a manner that the effective ranges stored in the project are formed. Batteries must be inserted in the transponders. The ID must be set on the transponders that is stored in the project for these transponders. The IDs of the effective ranges must be marked in the plant. The quality of the WLAN range must be sufficient. Procedure Proceed as follows:
1. Switch on the HMI device. The Windows CE desktop with Loader is displayed. 2. If the project does not start automatically, start the project. The "Transponder test" dialog box opens. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 197 Commissioning the HMI device 7.5 Preparing and backing up a project To the left you will see the list with the names of all configured effective ranges. 3. In the "Effective ranges" list highlight the first effective range that you want to verify. In the "Transponder" list on the right, the names of the transponders are displayed that are assigned to the effective range in the project. 4. Go to the first transponder that you want to verify in the "Transponder" list. 5. In the system, read the ID of the highlighted effective range and enter this ID in the
"Effective range" box. 6. Enter the ID of the transponder where you are located in the "Transponder" box. 7. Verify the entered ID with the "Test" button. When the HMI device receives the signal of the transponder specified, that transponder is considered to be checked. The transponder will be marked with a check mark in the list. 8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 for all transponders of this effective range. If you have successfully checked all transponders of an effective range, that effective range will be indicated with a check mark in the list. 9. Select the next effective range in the list. 10. Repeat steps 4 to 7 for all transponders assigned to this effective range. 11. Verify all additional effective ranges in the list to the left. 12. When you have successfully verified all effective ranges, touch the "Calculate" button. The HMI device calculates the CRC checksum. The CRC checksum is displayed in the
"CRC" box. 198 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Commissioning the HMI device 7.5 Preparing and backing up a project 13. Open the project in WinCC flexible ES. 14. Enter the checksum in the "Effective ranges" editor. 15. Transfer the project to the HMI device again. Result The HMI device can now be used for operating and monitoring the system. 7.5.4.3 Testing effective ranges After successful verification of the transponders and effective ranges you must test in the plant whether the expansion of the configured effective ranges corresponds to the planning. If the operating elements "Effective range name" and "Effective range quality" are available in the project, you can check the effective ranges on the HMI device. In particular, check the following cases:
Do the limits of the effective range run as planned?
Note particularly that machine operations from excessive distances are not permitted. Does the indicator that belongs to the effective range show whether an HMI device is logged on at the effective range?
Are moving machine parts influencing the reception of the transponders? Check also the extreme positions of moving machine parts. Is WLAN coverage ensured everywhere in the effective range?
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 199 Commissioning the HMI device 7.5 Preparing and backing up a project 7.5.5 Testing zones If zones are present in the system, you need to test whether the HMI device is detecting them. Note The following requirements must be fulfilled in order to test zones:
The project has been transferred to the HMI device and started The HMI device is in online mode The transponders have been fitted and the transponder IDs are set If the operating elements "Zone label" and "Zone quality" are present in the project, you can check the zones on the HMI device. In particular, check the following cases:
Are the zone limits operating as planned?
Are moving machine parts influencing the reception of the transponders? Check also the extreme positions of moving machine parts. Is WLAN coverage ensured in all parts of the zone?
7.5.6 Backup and restore 7.5.6.1 Overview Backup and restore You can back up and restore the following data found in the internal flash memory of the HMI device with a PC:
Project and HMI device image Password list Recipe data License keys Use one of the following tools for backup and restore:
WinCC flexible ProSave Note Alternatively, use the Control Panel to back up to an external memory device. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 200 General information Commissioning the HMI device 7.5 Preparing and backing up a project NOTICE Resetting to factory defaults required If a complete restore operation is interrupted due to power failure on the HMI device, the operating system of the HMI device may be deleted! In this case, you have to reset the HMI device to its factory settings. Compatibility conflict If a message is output on the HMI device warning of a compatibility conflict during the restore operation, the operating system must be updated. 7.5.6.2 Backup and restore using WinCC flexible Requirements No project is open on the configuring PC in WinCC flexible The HMI device is connected to this configuring PC The data channel is programmed on the HMI device Procedure for backup Proceed as follows:
1. On the configuring PC, select the "Communication settings" command in the menu
"Project > Transfer" in WinCC flexible. The "Communication settings" dialog box opens. 2. Select the type of HMI device. 3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC. 4. Set the connection parameters. 5. Close the dialog with "OK". 6. Select the "Backup" command in the menu "Project > Transfer" in WinCC flexible. The "Backup settings" dialog opens. 7. Select the data to be backed up. 8. Select a destination folder and a file name for the "*.psb" backup file. 9. Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device. 10. Start the backup operation in WinCC flexible with "OK" on the configuring PC. If automatic transfer has been selected on the HMI device, following a prompt the HMI device automatically switches to "Transfer" mode when a backup is initiated. 11. Follow the instructions in WinCC flexible. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 201 Commissioning the HMI device 7.5 Preparing and backing up a project A status view opens to indicate the progress of the operation. Result The system outputs a message when the backup is completed. The relevant data is now backed up on the configuring PC. Procedure for restoring Proceed as follows:
1. On the configuring PC, select the "Communication settings" command in the menu
"Project > Transfer" in WinCC flexible. The "Communication settings" dialog box opens. 2. Select the type of HMI device. 3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC. Set the connection parameters. 4. Close the dialog with "OK". 5. Select the "Restore" command in the menu "Project > Transfer" in WinCC flexible. The "Restore settings" dialog opens. 6. Select the "*.psb" backup file to be restored from the "Open" field. You can see the HMI device for which the backup file was created and the type of backup data the file contains. 7. Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device. If automatic transfer has been selected on the HMI device, following a prompt the HMI device automatically switches to "Transfer" mode when a restore operation is initiated. 8. Start the restore operation in WinCC flexible with "OK" on the configuring PC. If necessary, abort the backup and first back up the HMI device's license keys. If there are license keys both on the HMI device and in the backup, a dialog box will appear. Use this dialog to establish whether you want to overwrite the license keys or abort the restore process. Then restart the restore process. Follow the instructions in WinCC flexible. A status view opens to indicate the progress of the operation. When the restore is successfully completed, the data backed up on the configuring PC is now on the HMI device. Operating modes (Page 186) Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Result See also 202 Commissioning the HMI device 7.5 Preparing and backing up a project Data transmission options (Page 188) Programming the data channel (Page 160) Overview (Page 200) 7.5.6.3 Backup and restore using ProSave Requirements The HMI device is connected to a PC on which ProSave is installed The data channel is programmed on the HMI device Procedure for backup Proceed as follows:
1. From the Windows Start menu, start ProSave on the PC. 2. Select the HMI device type in the "General" tab. 3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the PC. 4. Set the connection parameters. 5. Select the data to be backed up in the "Backup" tab. 6. Select a destination folder and a file name for the "*.psb" backup file. 7. Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device. If automatic transfer has been selected on the HMI device, following a prompt the HMI device automatically switches to "Transfer" mode when a backup is initiated. 8. Start the backup operation in ProSave with "Start Backup". 9. Follow the instructions in ProSave. A status view opens to indicate the progress of the operation. Result The system outputs a message when the backup is completed. The relevant data is now backed up on the PC. Procedure for restoring Proceed as follows:
1. From the Windows Start menu, start ProSave on the PC. 2. Select the HMI device type in the "General" tab. 3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the PC. 4. Set the connection parameters. 5. Select the "*.psb" backup file to be restored from the "Restore" tab. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 203 Commissioning the HMI device 7.5 Preparing and backing up a project You can see the HMI device for which the backup file was created and the type of backup data the file contains. 6. Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device. If automatic transfer has been selected on the HMI device, following a prompt the HMI device automatically switches to "Transfer" mode when a restore operation is initiated. 7. Start the restore operation in ProSave on the PC with "Start Restore". If there are license keys both on the HMI device and in the backup, a dialog box will appear. Use this dialog to establish whether you want to overwrite the license keys or abort the restore process. Then restart the restore process. 8. Follow the instructions in ProSave. If necessary, abort the restore and first back up the HMI device's license keys. A status view opens to indicate the progress of the operation. When the restore is successfully completed, the data backed up on the PC is now on the HMI device. Result See also Operating modes (Page 186) Data transmission options (Page 188) Programming the data channel (Page 160) Overview (Page 200) 7.5.7 Updating the operating system 7.5.7.1 Overview Updating the operating system A compatibility conflict may occur when transferring a project to the HMI device. This is caused by different versions of the configuration software used and the HMI device image available on the HMI device. If there are different versions, the transfer is aborted. A message indicating a compatibility conflict is displayed on the configuring PC. There are two ways to match the versions:
Update the HMI device image if the project was created with the most recent version of the configuration software Transfer a matching version of the HMI device image if you do not want to adapt the project for the HMI device to the most recent version of the configuration software for the project 204 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 General information Commissioning the HMI device 7.5 Preparing and backing up a project NOTICE Resetting to factory defaults required If the update of the HMI device image is interrupted due to a power failure on the HMI device, the operating system of the HMI device may be deleted. In this case, you have to reset the HMI device to its factory settings. NOTICE Data loss All data on the HMI device, such as the project and passwords, will be deleted when you update the operating system. Note Calibrating the touch screen After updating the operating system, you may have to recalibrate the touch screen. Resetting to factory settings In ProSave or WinCC flexible, you can update the operating system with or without resetting to factory settings. CAUTION IP65 degree of protection not fulfilled To update the operating system and reset to factory settings, you need an Ethernet connection over the RJ45 interface. If you connect the configuring PC directly to the HMI device through the RJ45 interface, you must open the connection compartment. If the connection bay is open, degree of protection IP 65 is not fulfilled. Updating the operating system without resetting to factory settings First, switch into "Transfer" mode on the HMI device or use the automatic transfer function if the project is active. Then start the operating system update in ProSave or WinCC flexible. Updating the operating system with reset to factory setting NOTICE Loss of license keys The license keys on the HMI device will be deleted when resetting to factory settings. The license keys on the HMI device will be retained when updating the operating system without resetting to factory settings. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 205 Commissioning the HMI device 7.5 Preparing and backing up a project NOTICE Data channels When resetting to factory settings, all data channel parameters are reset. The transfer can only be started following reconfiguration of the data channels. Note You have to perform an operating system update with reset to factory settings if the HMI device does not yet have an operating system or if the operating system of the HMI device is corrupt. First, start the operating system update in ProSave or WinCC flexible and switch the power on the HMI device off and on again when prompted. 7.5.7.2 Updating the operating system using WinCC flexible Requirements Procedure No project is open on the configuring PC in WinCC flexible The HMI device is connected to this configuring PC The data channel is programmed on the HMI device Proceed as follows:
1. On the configuring PC, select the "Communication settings" command in the menu
"Project > Transfer" in WinCC flexible. The "Communication settings" dialog box opens. 2. Select the type of HMI device. 3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC. 4. Set the connection parameters. 5. Close the dialog with "OK". 6. In WinCC flexible, select the command "Update OS" in the "Project > Transfer" menu. 7. In "Image path", select the HMI device image file "*.img". The HMI device image files are available under "WinCC flexible Images" in the WinCC flexible installation folder or on the WinCC flexible installation CD. In the output area, you are provided information on the version of the HMI device image file after it is opened. 8. Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device. If automatic transfer has been activated on the HMI device, following a prompt the HMI device automatically switches to "Transfer" mode when an update is initiated. 9. In WinCC flexible, select "Update OS" on the configuring PC to run the operating system update. 206 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Commissioning the HMI device 7.5 Preparing and backing up a project 10. Follow the instructions in WinCC flexible. During the operating system update a status view opens to indicate progress. A message is displayed when the operating system update is successfully completed. This operation has deleted the project data from the HMI device. Result See also Operating modes (Page 186) Data transmission options (Page 188) Programming the data channel (Page 160) Overview (Page 204) 7.5.7.3 Updating the operating system using ProSave Requirements Procedure The HMI device is connected to a PC on which ProSave is installed The data channel is programmed on the HMI device Proceed as follows:
1. From the Windows Start menu, start ProSave on the PC. 2. Select the HMI device type in the "General" tab. 3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the PC. 4. Set the connection parameters. 5. Select the "OS Update" tab. 6. In "Image path", select the HMI device image file "*.img". The HMI device image files are available under "WinCC flexible Images" in the WinCC flexible installation folder or on the WinCC flexible installation CD. In the output area, you are provided information on the version of the HMI device image file after it is opened. 7. Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device. If automatic transfer has been activated on the HMI device, following a prompt the HMI device automatically switches to "Transfer" mode when an update is initiated. 8. Select "Update OS" on the PC to run the operating system update. 9. Follow the instructions in ProSave. During the operating system update a status view opens to indicate progress. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 207 Commissioning the HMI device 7.5 Preparing and backing up a project Result See also A message is displayed when the operating system update is successfully completed. This operation has deleted the project data from the HMI device. Operating modes (Page 186) Data transmission options (Page 188) Programming the data channel (Page 160) Overview (Page 204) 7.5.7.4 Resetting to factory settings with WinCC flexible Requirements No project is open on the configuring PC in WinCC flexible The HMI device is connected to this configuring PC over the Ethernet Have the MAC address of your HMI device's Ethernet interface to hand. The MAC address is displayed briefly when the HMI device is turned on. The MAC address is displayed in the "PROFINET" dialog in the Control Panel. Procedure for setting the PC interface 1. Select "Start > Control Panel > Set PG/PC interface". 2. Select "S7ONLINE (STEP7) -> TCP/IP" from the "Application access point" area. 3. Select the interface which is connected to the HMI device from the "Interface parameterization used" area. 4. Confirm your entries. Procedure for resetting to factory settings Proceed as follows:
1. Turn off the power supply to the HMI device. 2. On the configuring PC, select the "Communication settings" command in the menu
"Project > Transfer" in WinCC flexible. The "Communication settings" dialog box opens. 3. Select the HMI device type from the "General" tab, and select "Ethernet" from the
"Connection" area. 4. Enter an IP address. 208 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Commissioning the HMI device 7.5 Preparing and backing up a project Note Possible address conflicts with incorrect IP address Do not use a dynamic IP configuration for "Reset factory settings". Define an IP address which the HMI device is going to receive from the configuration station during the update process. If the HMI device has already been used with WinCC flexible or ProSave you can use the existing IP address for "Reset factory settings". 1. Confirm your entries. 2. In WinCC flexible, select the command "Update OS" in the "Project > Transfer" menu. 3. Select the "Reset factory settings" check box. A text box opens where you can enter the MAC address. 4. Enter the HMI device's MAC address in the text box. 5. In "Image path", select the HMI device image file "*.img". The HMI device image files are available under "WinCC flexible Images" in the WinCC flexible installation folder or on the WinCC flexible installation CD. In the output area, you are provided information on the version of the HMI device image file after it is opened. 6. In WinCC flexible, select "Update OS" on the configuring PC to run the operating system update. 7. Follow the instructions in WinCC flexible. During the operating system update a status view opens to indicate progress. Result A message is displayed when the operating system update is successfully completed. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 209 Commissioning the HMI device 7.5 Preparing and backing up a project This operation has deleted the project data from the HMI device. The factory settings are reset. Note Calibrating the touch screen After the restore, you may have to re-calibrate the touch screen. See also Operating modes (Page 186) Data transmission options (Page 188) Programming the data channel (Page 160) Overview (Page 204) 7.5.7.5 Resetting to factory settings with ProSave Requirements The HMI device is connected over the Ethernet to a PC on which ProSave is installed When updating the operating system with reset to factory setting only:
Have the MAC address of your HMI device's Ethernet interface to hand. The MAC address is displayed briefly when the HMI device is turned on. The MAC address is displayed in the "PROFINET" dialog in the Control Panel. Procedure for setting the PC interface 1. Select "Start > Control Panel > Set PG/PC interface". 2. Select "S7ONLINE (STEP7) -> TCP/IP" from the "Application access point" area. 3. Select the interface which is connected to the HMI device from the "Interface parameterization used" area. 4. Confirm your entries. Procedure for resetting factory settings Proceed as follows:
1. Turn off the power supply to the HMI device. 2. From the Windows Start menu, start ProSave on the PC. 3. Select the HMI device type from the "General" tab, and select "Ethernet" from the
"Connection" area. 4. Enter an IP address. 210 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Commissioning the HMI device 7.5 Preparing and backing up a project Note Possible address conflicts with incorrect IP address Do not use a dynamic IP configuration for "Reset factory settings". Define an IP address which the HMI device is going to receive from the configuration station during the update process. If the HMI device has already been used with WinCC flexible or ProSave you can use the existing IP address for "Reset factory settings". 1. Change to the "OS Update" tab. 2. Select the "Reset factory settings" check box. A text box opens where you can enter the MAC address. 3. Enter the MAC address of the HMI device 4. In "Image path", select the HMI device image file "*.img". The HMI device image files are available under "WinCC flexible Images" in the WinCC flexible installation folder or on the WinCC flexible installation CD. In the output area, you are provided information on the version of the HMI device image file after it is opened. 5. Select "Update OS" on the PC to run the operating system update. 6. Follow the instructions in ProSave. During the operating system update a status view opens to indicate progress. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 211 Commissioning the HMI device 7.5 Preparing and backing up a project Result A message is displayed when the operating system update is successfully completed. This operation has deleted the project data from the HMI device. The factory settings are reset. Note Calibrating the touch screen After the restore, you may have to re-calibrate the touch screen. See also Operating modes (Page 186) Data transmission options (Page 188) Programming the data channel (Page 160) Overview (Page 204) 7.5.8 Installing and removing options 7.5.8.1 Overview Installing and removing options You can install options on the HMI device, for example, additional programs developed especially for the HMI device. You can also remove the option from the HMI device again. Note License key A license key may be needed to run an option. The license key unlocks the option for use. 7.5.8.2 Installing and removing options using WinCC flexible Requirements No project is open on the configuring PC in WinCC flexible The HMI device is connected to this configuring PC The data channel is programmed on the HMI device 212 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Procedure for installing an option Commissioning the HMI device 7.5 Preparing and backing up a project Proceed as follows:
1. On the configuring PC, select the "Communication settings" command in the menu
"Project > Transfer" in WinCC flexible. The "Communication settings" dialog box opens. 2. Select the type of HMI device. 3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC. 4. Set the connection parameters. 5. Close the dialog with "OK". 6. Select the "Options" command in the menu "Project > Transfer" in WinCC flexible. 7. Select the desired option under "Available options". 8. Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device. If automatic transfer is activated on the HMI device, following a prompt the HMI device automatically switches to "Transfer" mode when the installation of an option is initiated. 9. Start the installation of the option in WinCC flexible on the configuring PC with the ">>"
button. 10. Follow the instructions in WinCC flexible. A status display appears indicating the progress of the installation. Result The option has now been installed on the HMI device. Procedure for removing an option Proceed as follows:
1. On the configuring PC, select the "Communication settings" command in the menu
"Project > Transfer" in WinCC flexible. The "Communication settings" dialog box opens. 2. Select the type of HMI device. 3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC. 4. Set the connection parameters. 5. Close the dialog with "OK". 6. Select the "Options" command in the menu "Project > Transfer" in WinCC flexible. 7. Press the "Device status" button to update the display. 8. Select the desired option under "Installed options". 9. Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device. If automatic transfer is activated on the HMI device, following a prompt the HMI device automatically switches to "Transfer" mode when the removal of an option is initiated. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 213 Commissioning the HMI device 7.5 Preparing and backing up a project 10. Start the removal of the option in WinCC flexible on the configuring PC with the "<<"
button. 11. Follow the instructions in WinCC flexible. A status display appears indicating the progress of the removal. Result See also The option has now been removed on the HMI device. Operating modes (Page 186) Data transmission options (Page 188) Programming the data channel (Page 160) Overview (Page 212) 7.5.8.3 Installing and removing options using ProSave Requirements The HMI device is connected to a PC on which ProSave is installed The data channel is programmed on the HMI device Procedure for installing an option Proceed as follows:
1. From the Windows Start menu, start ProSave on the PC. 2. Select the HMI device type in the "General" tab. 3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the PC. 4. Set the connection parameters. 5. Select the "Options" tab. 6. Select the desired option under "Available options". 7. Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device. If automatic transfer is activated on the HMI device, following a prompt the HMI device automatically switches to "Transfer" mode when the installation of an option is initiated. 8. Start the installation of the option in ProSave with the ">>" button. 9. Follow the instructions in ProSave. A status display appears indicating the progress of the installation. 214 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Result Commissioning the HMI device 7.5 Preparing and backing up a project The option has now been installed on the HMI device. Procedure for removing an option Proceed as follows:
1. From the Windows Start menu, start ProSave on the PC. 2. Select the HMI device type in the "General" tab. 3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the PC. 4. Set the connection parameters. 5. Select the "Options" tab. 6. Press the "Device status" button to update the display. 7. Select the desired option under "Installed options". 8. Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device. If automatic transfer is activated on the HMI device, following a prompt the HMI device automatically switches to "Transfer" mode when the removal of an option is initiated. 9. Start the removal of the option in ProSave with the "<<" button. 10. Follow the instructions in ProSave. A status display appears indicating the progress of the removal. Result See also The option has now been removed on the HMI device. Operating modes (Page 186) Data transmission options (Page 188) Programming the data channel (Page 160) Overview (Page 212) 7.5.9 Transferring and transferring back license keys 7.5.9.1 Overview Transferring and transferring back license keys With the purchase of an optional package, you obtain a specific user license with an associated license key. Once you have installed an option, transfer a license key to the HMI device. The license key unlocks an option for use. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 215 Commissioning the HMI device 7.5 Preparing and backing up a project You can also transfer back the license key from the HMI device to the storage location. Note You only transfer license keys with the Automation License Manager or WinCC flexible. 7.5.9.2 Transferring and transferring back license keys Requirements When transferring or transferring back using WinCC flexible:
No project is open on the configuring PC in WinCC flexible The HMI device is connected to this configuring PC The data channel is programmed on the HMI device The storage location and the license key awaiting transfer are ready Procedure for transferring a license key Proceed as follows:
1. Switch to "Transfer" mode on the HMI device. 2. When transferring using WinCC flexible:
Select the "License Keys" command in the menu "Project > Transfer". The Automation License Manager opens. When transferring using the Automation License Manager:
Start the Automation License Manager via the Windows Start menu. 3. In the Automation License Manager, select the command "Connect HMI device" in the menu "Edit > Connect target system". The "Connect target system" dialog opens. 4. Under "Device type", select the appropriate HMI device type. 5. Select the type of connection from the "Connection" box. 6. Set the connection parameters. 7. Select "OK". The connection to the HMI device is established. The connected HMI device is displayed in the left window of the Automation License Manager. 8. In the left window, select the source drive. The right window displays the available license keys. 9. Drag one or more license keys from the right window and drop them on the HMI device in the left window. The license keys are then transferred to the HMI device. 216 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Result Commissioning the HMI device 7.5 Preparing and backing up a project The license key is transferred from the storage location to the HMI device. Procedure for transferring back a license key Proceed as follows:
1. Switch to "Transfer" mode on the HMI device. 2. When transferring back using WinCC flexible:
Select the "License Keys" command in the menu "Project > Transfer". The Automation License Manager opens. When transferring back using the Automation License Manager:
Start the Automation License Manager via the Windows Start menu. 3. In the Automation License Manager, select the command "Connect HMI device" in the menu "Edit > Connect target system". The "Connect target system" dialog opens. 4. Under "Device type", select the appropriate HMI device type. 5. Select the type of connection from the "Connection" box. 6. Set the connection parameters. 7. Select "OK". The connection to the HMI device is established. The connected HMI device is displayed in the left window of the Automation License Manager. 8. In the left window, select the HMI device. The right window displays the available license keys. 9. Drag one or more license keys from the right-hand window and drop them on the target drive in the left-hand window. The license keys are transferred back to the storage location. The license key is transferred back from the HMI device to the storage location. Operating modes (Page 186) Programming the data channel (Page 160) Result See also Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 217 Fail-safe mode 8.1 Organizational measures 8 The HMI device should only be operated in the system with a battery or in the charging station. To ensure fail-safe operation of the HMI device the organizational measures described below must be complied with. Storing the HMI device WARNING Non-functional emergency stop button If the HMI device is not integrated, the emergency stop button does not function. To avoid confusion between effective and non-effective emergency stop buttons, only one integrated HMI device should be freely accessible. If the HMI device is not in use, it must be stored in a locked area. Handling the HMI device during operation CAUTION Shutdown or rampdown of the system due to empty battery An integrated HMI device with flat battery triggers a communication error. This results in the following reaction of the F CPU:
Check the charge status of the battery of the ready-for-operation device via the "BAT" LED. Recharge the HMI device in good time. If the HMI device is logged on at the effective range: Shutdown If the HMI device is not logged on at the effective range: Global rampdown To charge the batteries, the ambient temperature / battery temperature must not exceed 40 C The higher the temperature, the longer it will take for the battery to charge. Find a place with a cool ambient temperature for the charging station. If necessary, allow the battery to cool first. You can check the battery temperature in the "OP" dialog box, "Battery" tab in the Control Panel. Alternatively, change the main battery. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 219 Fail-safe mode 8.2 Switch-off behavior The following must be noted when working with the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN:
Pay attention to the "SAFE" LED. If the HMI device is integrated in fail-safe communication, the "SAFE" lights up and the emergency stop button is active. Pay attention to the "COM" LED. If you leave the area with sufficient WLAN coverage, the "COM" LED will flash. Communication between the HMI device and PLC is down. You can no longer operate the system with the HMI device. Check the "RNG" LED when the HMI device is logged onto the effective range. The "RNG" LED indicates when the HMI device is logged onto the effective range. Logging onto the effective range is required for the enabling button to be active. CAUTION Unauthorized operation possible It is not permitted to leave the effective range without an HMI device while the HMI device is logged on to the effective range. 8.2 Switch-off behavior Introduction Different switch-off behavior is possible depending on the situation in the plant:
Emergency stop Shutdown Local rampdown Global rampdown Plant switch-off differs in its triggers and effects. DANGER No triggering of safety states The switch-off behavior described is only triggered in the system if the F CPU has been programmed accordingly. Press the emergency stop button to trigger the emergency stop. The emergency stop depends on the effective ranges. If the emergency stop button is pressed, the F CPU triggers an immediate stop of the machines assigned to it. Emergency stop 220 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Fail-safe mode 8.2 Switch-off behavior The emergency stop button is always active if there is PROFIsafe communication between HMI device and F CPU, i.e. if the HMI device is integrated in the PROFIsafe communication. If PROFIsafe communication is present the "SAFE" LED lights up. Shutdown is triggered by the F CPU. The shutdown is specific to the effective range. If the F CPU detects a communication error for an HMI device logged on in the effective range, it triggers the emergency stop of the machines that belong to the effective range. Shutdown Local rampdown Local rampdown is triggered if the HMI device is logged on at the effective range and if it leaves the effective range for longer than 30 seconds. Local rampdown is specific to the effective range. Local rampdown triggers a defined slow stop of the machines of the effective range. Global rampdown Global rampdown is triggered by the F CPU. Global rampdown is independent of the effective ranges. For global rampdown the following response must be programmed in the safety program of the F CPU: If the F CPU detects a communication error for an HMI device integrated in the PROFIsafe communication, it triggers a defined slow stop of the machines subordinate to it. Fact Trigger Switch-off behavior can be triggered by the following:
The emergency stop button is pressed. A communication error occurs. Timeout: The HMI device is logged onto the effective range and the operator leaves the effective range with the HMI device for longer than 30 seconds. Triggering the switch off The following table shows the effect of the different triggers depending on the operating situation:
Operating situation HMI not integrated HMI integrated HMI device logged on at the HMI device is in the effective range Trigger Emergency stop pressed
Emergency stop Communication error
Shutdown Timeout
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 221 Fail-safe mode 8.3 Integrating the HMI device effective range HMI device is outside of the effective range for less than 30 seconds HMI device is outside of the effective range for longer than 30 seconds HMI device is logged off from the effective range Trigger Emergency stop Shutdown
Emergency stop Shutdown Local rampdown Emergency stop Global rampdown
8.3 Integrating the HMI device Introduction Integrating Requirements Procedure During fail-safe operation, a safety program runs in the F CPU. This safety program communicates with the HMI device. The F CPU monitors the communication for errors and evaluates the signals. The terms "integrate" and "remove" refer to integrating the HMI device in and removing it from the safety program of the F CPU. If the HMI device is configured for the safety program, it is automatically integrated in the safety program when the project is started. The "SAFE" LED lights up to indicate that integration is complete. The emergency stop button becomes active as soon as the HMI device is integrated. WLAN communication is established. The Loader is displayed on the HMI device. Effective ranges and transponders are accepted. Proceed as follows:
1. If the project does not start automatically, start it in the Loader. PROFIsafe communication is established. While the connection is being established, the
"Establishing secure connection" dialog box is displayed. The HMI device is integrated in the safety program of the F CPU. The "Test enabling button" dialog box opens. 2. Fully press both enabling buttons. 222 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Result Fail-safe mode 8.4 Removing the HMI device The project start screen appears. The "SAFE" LED lights up. 8.4 Removing the HMI device Removing This concept refers to intentionally removing the HMI device from the safety program. You have the following options for removing the HMI device:
Close the project. Press and hold the ON/OFF button for at least 4 seconds. After it has been removed, the HMI device switches off. No side effects (such as a global rampdown) occur as a result of the operator removing the HMI device. Once the removal procedure is complete, the "SAFE" LED goes out and the emergency stop button is no longer active. WARNING Non-functional emergency stop button If the HMI device is not integrated, the emergency stop button does not function. To avoid confusion between effective and non-effective emergency stop buttons, only one integrated HMI device should be freely accessible. If the HMI device is not in use, it must be stored in a locked cabinet. The project is started. The HMI device is integrated in the safety program of the F CPU. Proceed as follows:
1. To close the project, use the operating element designed for this purpose. Alternatively, press and hold the ON/OFF button for at least 4 seconds. Following a prompt, the "Confirm removal" dialog box is displayed. 2. Press the enabling button to confirm the dialog box. The "SAFE" LED on the HMI device goes out as soon as you have pressed the enabling button to confirm the removal. Requirements Procedure Result Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 223 Fail-safe mode 8.5 Logging onto and off from the effective range PROFIsafe communication is terminated. The HMI device is removed from the safety program of the F CPU. The project is terminated. If you have pressed the ON/OFF button, the HMI device switches off. Removal in the event of a communication error In the event of a communication error, the F CPU removes the HMI device and initiates a global rampdown. The "SAFE" LED on the HMI device goes out. The project is terminated. 8.5 Logging onto and off from the effective range Introduction An effective range is the range in which sections of the system, for example a machine, can be operated with the enabling buttons of the HMI device. As soon as you are in an effective range with the HMI device, you can log the device onto the effective range. Fail-safe operation of the system section delimited by the effective range is only possible after the HMI device has been successfully logged on. Note Before leaving the effective range with the HMI device, you must log it off from the effective range. Requirements for logging on The HMI device is integrated. The "SAFE" LED lights up. The ID of the effective range is marked in the system. The HMI device is located within the effective range. No other HMI devices are logged onto this effective range. The "Effective range name" operating element is configured and displayed as follows:
"Rangename" indicates the name in the case of any effective range. Procedure for logging on 1. Touch the "Effective range name" operating element. The "Effective range logon" dialog box opens. 2. Read the ID of the effective range from the machine or system to be operated. 3. Enter the ID of the effective range. 4. Confirm your entries. 224 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Result The dialog closes. Fail-safe mode 8.5 Logging onto and off from the effective range If the ID entered matches the ID configured for the effective range, the HMI device is logged onto the effective range. No other HMI device can log onto this effective range. The "RNG" LED lights up. You can use the enabling buttons to operate the machine in the effective range. The "Effective range name" operating element is displayed as follows:
. Behavior in the effective range following successful logging on CAUTION Shutdown If the HMI device is in a state where it is constantly ready for operation, the battery will lose its charge. A flat battery will result in a communication error. The F CPU initiates a shutdown. Under no circumstances should the effective range be left without an HMI device while the HMI device is logged onto the effective range. CAUTION Rampdown If you leave the effective range without logging off, or the HMI device no longer recognizes the transponder, the following steps are carried out:
After 5 seconds, the "Effective range left without logging off" dialog box appears. If you do not return to the effective range within 25 seconds, the HMI devices initiates a local rampdown and begins logging off from the effective range. The HMI device is logged off from the effective range once logging off has been confirmed. This means that other HMI devices are free to log onto the effective range. Return to the effective range in good time. Always align the HMI device so that it is possible to measure the distance between the HMI device and the transponder. Note the displays of the HMI device LEDs; in particular, the "RNG" and "BAT" LEDs. The HMI device will trigger the vibration alarm under the following circumstances (if configured):
The charging status of the battery is < 10%. You leave the effective range with the HMI device without logging the HMI device off from the effective range. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 225 Fail-safe mode 8.6 "Override" mode Requirements for logging off The HMI device is logged onto the effective range. The "RNG" LED lights up. The "Effective range name" operating element is configured and displayed as follows:
Procedure for logging off Before leaving the effective range or project, you must log off from the effective range. 1. Touch the "Effective range name" operating element. The "Effective range logoff" dialog box opens. 2. Confirm logging off with the "OK" button. Result See also The HMI device is no longer logged onto the effective range. The "RNG" LED goes out. Other HMI devices can now log onto this effective range. The "Effective range name" operating element may be displayed as either of the following:
or Distance measurement between HMI device and transponder (Page 61) Displaying the effective range name (Page 247) 8.6
"Override" mode Introduction The effective range functionality of the HMI device can be extended with the "Override"
mode.
"Override" mode can be used in the following cases:
Application of existing protective measures instead of the effective range functionality If there are already safety measurements in your system, e.g. safety gates, they can be integrated into the safety concept with the "Override" mode. When sections of the system that are not covered by transponders (inside a robot cell, for example) are to be operated with the enabling buttons. In this case the system area must be secured by additional safety measurements, with a safety gate for example. 226 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Fail-safe mode 8.6 "Override" mode
"Override" mode must only be used in defined system zones that are secured by additional protective measures, such as a safety gate. The switch for activating "Override" mode must be inside the protective device, and in an effective range. Sample configuration:
Safety gate Switch for activating "Override" mode Transponder for logging onto the effective range Foot grating for access monitoring HMI device Machine to be operated For additional notes on this subject, refer to the System manual "Safety Integrated" and the Function manual "Fail-safe operation of the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN". Requirements for activating "Override" mode The system has the protective devices specified for "Override" mode. The HMI device is integrated. The "SAFE" LED lights up. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 227 Fail-safe mode 8.6 "Override" mode The HMI device is logged onto the same effective range in which the override switch located. The "RNG" LED lights up. NOTICE If "Override" mode is activated and you leave the defined system area, "Override" mode will be automatically deactivated. You must reactivate the override switch when you return to the defined system area. Procedure for activating "Override" mode 1. Enter the protection zone. The protective device is thereby activated. 2. Activate the override switch. Result
"Override" mode is active. The "Effective range quality" screen object is displayed entirely in green. The transponders are not evaluated when forming the effective range. Use the HMI device to operate the machine as though you were in the middle of the effective range. This approach applies for the entire override range. No other HMI device can log onto the effective range. Requirements for deactivating "Override" mode
"Override" mode is activated. NOTICE It is only possible to log back onto this effective range once you have performed the following actions:
You have deactivated "Override" mode using the override switch. You have logged the HMI device off from the effective range. The "RNG" LED is off. Procedure for deactivating "Override" mode 1. Use the override switch to deactivate "Override" mode. Result 228
"Override" mode is deactivated. The HMI device is still logged onto the effective range. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 See also Displaying the effective range quality (Page 248) Displaying the effective range name (Page 247) Fail-safe mode 8.6 "Override" mode Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 229 Operating a project 9.1 Starting the project Requirements 9 In order to switch on the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN and start the project, the following requirements must be met:
The batteries have been charged and inserted in the HMI device If the batteries are not available, place the HMI device in the charging station The project has been transferred to the HMI device. The WLAN quality is sufficient Transponders, if effective ranges/zones are configured:
The transponders are installed The batteries are fitted in the transponders A unique ID has been set in the transponders that matches the project parameterization Switching on the HMI device Press the ON/OFF button. The HMI device performs the following steps:
1. The HMI device starts. 2. The "PWR" LED lights up. 3. The "BAT" LED shows the charging status of the inserted main battery. 4. If effective ranges are configured in the project, you will need to perform an acceptance test when the project is started for the first time. 5. The WLAN connection is established. Establishing the WLAN connection SSIDs for up to 3 WLAN networks can be stored in the project. The WLAN networks stored in the project must be parameterized on the HMI device and must be included in the list of preferred networks on the HMI device. The WLAN connection is established as follows:
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 231 Operating a project 9.2 Error cases 1. If one of the 3 WLAN networks is available when the HMI device is started, the HMI device connects automatically. The "COM" LED will flash as long as the WLAN connection is established. The configured sequence of SSIDs determines the order in which the HMI device will attempt to connect to the WLAN networks. 2. If the HMI device cannot establish a connection with any of the 3 configured WLAN networks, the HMI device will attempt to connect to other WLAN networks. For this to happen, connection to other WLAN networks must be authorized in the project. 3. Once the HMI device has established the WLAN connection, the "COM" LED lights up. 4. If the HMI device was unable to establish a connection with any of the WLAN networks, Not Connected is displayed in the status line of the dialog box. The project cannot be started. Note Notes on fail-safe operation It is imperative that you observe the chapter titled "Fail-safe operation", and in particular the Organizational measures (Page 219). Operation Starting the project When the HMI device is in the Loader, the project can either be started manually using the
"Start" button, or will start automatically, depending on how the project has been configured. An automatic start occurs either immediately or after a configured delay time. The following steps are carried out when the project is starting:
1. The HMI device is integrated. 2. The emergency stop button becomes active. 3. The HMI device will show the project start screen or the zone-specific screen. See also Acceptance of the system (Page 196) Integrating the HMI device (Page 222) 9.2 Error cases During fail-safe operation, you must be aware that the following error cases may arise:
232 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Operating a project 9.2 Error cases Leaving the HMI device logged onto the effective range CAUTION Shutdown Under no circumstances should the effective range be left without an HMI device while the HMI device is logged onto the effective range. If the HMI device is in a state where it is constantly ready for operation, the battery will lose its charge. A flat battery will result in a communication error. The F CPU initiates a shutdown. Log the HMI device off from the effective range. Switch off the HMI device if it is not needed. Alternatively, hook the HMI device into the charging station. Internal error If an internal error occurs on the HMI device, the "SAFE" and "RNG" LEDs go out, and the project is terminated immediately. The HMI device shows a red error display. Safety functions are no longer available. Contact the SIEMENS hotline. Communication error If a communication error occurs on the HMI device, the "SAFE" LED goes out. Safety functions are no longer available. If the HMI device is logged onto the effective range:
The F CPU initiates a shutdown. The F CPU stops the section of the system that belongs to the effective range. If the HMI device is not logged on to the effective range:
The F CPU initiates a global rampdown. If communication is reestablished within 60 seconds:
The emergency stop button becomes active again. The "SAFE" LED lights up again. Acknowledge the communication error. If it was logged onto the effective range, the HMI device is logged off. The "RNG" LED goes out. If communication remains interrupted for more than 60 seconds:
The HMI device terminates the project. The "RNG" LED goes out. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 233 Operating a project 9.3 Direct keys 9.3 Direct keys Introduction Direct keys on the HMI device are used to set bits in the I/O area of a SIMATIC S7. Direct keys enable operations with short reaction times, that are, for example, a jog mode requirement. NOTICE PLC stop Please note that leaving the WLAN area will cause the PROFINET IO device to fail and will therefore result in a PLC stop. Determine suitable programming measures in the PLC, in order to prevent a PLC stop. Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there. NOTICE Effectiveness of direct keys in offline mode Direct keys are active when both of the following conditions are satisfied:
The HMI device is in an area with sufficient WLAN coverage. The HMI device is in "Offline" mode. NOTICE If you operate a function key with direct key functionality in a running project, the direct key function is always executed, independent of the current screen contents. The following objects can be configured as a direct key:
Buttons Function keys Screen numbers Handwheel Illuminated pushbutton Key-operated switch Note Direct keys result in additional basic load on the HMI device. Additional information about direct keys is available in the system manual "WinCC flexible communication". Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Direct keys 234 9.4 Operator input options Operating a project 9.4 Operator input options Once the project is transferred to the HMI device, current processes can be operated and monitored in the process control phase. You have the following options for operating the HMI device:
Touch screen The HMI device is operated by means of the touch screen. The operating elements shown in the dialogs are touch-sensitive. Touch objects are basically operated in the same way as mechanical keys. You activate operating elements by touching them with your finger. To double-click them, touch an operating element twice in succession. CAUTION Do not use any pointed or sharp objects when operating the touch screen. Otherwise this may damage the plastic membrane of the touch screen. External input devices The following operator controls can be connected externally:
Keyboard, connected via USB Mouse, connected via USB The use of external input devices is recommended for commissioning. Operating a project with an external keyboard An external keyboard can be used to operate a project in exactly the same way as with the HMI keyboard or screen keyboard. Note The function keys of the external keyboard are disabled. Use other keys on the external keyboard, which correspond to the HMI device keys. Operating a project with an external mouse An external mouse can be used to operate a project in exactly the same way as with the HMI touch screen. Click the described operating elements with the mouse. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 235 Operating a project 9.4 Operator input options Unintentional actions CAUTION Do not carry out several operations simultaneously. You may otherwise trigger unintentional actions. With touch control:
Always touch only one operating element on the screen With key operation via an external keyboard:
Do not press more than two keys simultaneously Observing the plant documentation Some operations with the project may require in-depth knowledge about the specific plant on the part of the operator. Proceed with caution, for example, when you use jog mode. Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there. Operation feedback from operating elements The HMI device provides optical feedback as soon as it detects that an operating elements has been selected. The operating element receives the focus and is selected. This selection is independent of any communication with the PLC. Therefore this selection does not indicate whether the relevant action is actually executed or not. The configuration engineer can also configure the selection of an operating element so that it deviates from the standard. Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there. Optical feedback from operating elements The type of optical feedback depends on the operating element:
Buttons The HMI device outputs different views of the "Pressed" and "Unpressed" states, provided the configuration engineer has configured a 3D effect:
"Pressed" state:
A "Unpressed" state:
236 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Operating a project 9.5 Function keys The configuration engineer determines the appearance of a marked field, for example, line width and color for the focus. Invisible buttons By default, invisible buttons are not displayed as pressed when they are touched. No optical operation feedback is provided in this case. The configuration engineer may, however, configure invisible buttons so that their outline appears as lines when touched. This outline remains visible until you select another operating element. I/O fields When you select an I/O field, the content of the I/O field is displayed against a colored background. With touch operation, a screen keyboard is displayed for the entering of values. 9.5 Function keys Function keys Function key assignment is defined during configuration. The configuration engineer can assign function keys globally and locally. Function keys with global function assignment A globally assigned function key always triggers the same action on the HMI device or in the PLC irrespective of the screen displayed. Such an action could be, for example, the activation of a screen or the closure of an alarm window. Function keys with local function assignment A function key with local function assignment is screen-specific and is therefore only effective within the active screen. The function assigned locally to a function key can vary from screen to screen. The function key of a screen can be assigned one function only, either a global or local one. The local assignment function takes priority over the global setting. The configuration engineer can assign function keys in such a way that you can operate operating elements with function keys, for example, the alarm view, trend view, recipe view or status / PLC. Multi-key operation Unwanted actions may be triggered, if the operator unintentionally actuates a key combination. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 237 Operating a project 9.6 Setting the project language CAUTION Unintentional actions In "Online" mode, simultaneous operation of more than two keys may cause unintentional actions in the plant. Do not press more than two keys simultaneously. 9.6 Setting the project language Introduction Requirements The HMI device supports multilingual projects. You must have configured a corresponding operating element which lets you change the language setting on the HMI device during runtime. The project always starts with the language set in the previous session. The required language for the project must be available on the HMI device The language switching function must be logically linked to a configured operating element such as a button Selecting a language You can change project languages at any time. Language-specific objects are immediately output to the screen in the new language when you switch languages. The following options are available for switching the language:
A configured operating element switches from one language to the next in a list A configured operating element directly sets the desired language Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there. 238 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 9.7 Input 9.7.1 Overview Screen keyboard Operating a project 9.7 Input When you touch an operating element requiring entry on the HMI device touch screen, a screen keyboard appears. The screen keyboard is displayed in the following cases:
An I/O field is selected for input A password must be entered for accessing a password-protected function The screen keyboard is automatically hidden again when input is complete. Based on the configuration of the operating element, the system displays different screen keyboards for entering numerical or alphanumerical values. Note The screen keyboard display is independent of the configured project language. General procedure The operating elements of a screen are operated by touching the touch screen. Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the desired operating element within the screen. 2. Depending on the operating element, perform further actions. Detailed descriptions can be found under the respective operating element. Examples:
Symbolic I/O field: Select an entry from the drop down list box Slider control: Move the slider control I/O field: Enter numerical, alphanumerical or symbolic values in the I/O field Procedure for text boxes Values are entered in the project text boxes. Based on your configuration, the values are saved to tags and transferred, for example, to the PLC. Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the desired text box within the screen. The screen keyboard opens. Depending on your configuration, you can enter values in the text box in the following manner:
Numerical values, for example decimal numbers, hexadecimal numbers, binary values Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 239 Operating a project 9.7 Input Alphanumerical values, for example digits and letters Date/time 2. Enter the value. 3. Confirm your entry with or discard your entry with the button
. 9.7.2 Entering and editing numerical values Numerical screen keyboard When you touch an operating element for numerical input on the HMI-device touch screen, the numerical screen keyboard appears. This is the case, for example, for a text box. The screen keyboard is automatically hidden again when input is complete. Figure 9-1 Numerical screen keyboard Note Opened screen keyboard When the screen keyboard is open, PLC job 51, "Select screen" has no function. Formats for numerical values You can enter values in numerical text boxes based on the following formats:
Decimal Binary Hexadecimal Note Entry of hexadecimal values When you enter values in hexadecimal format, the alphanumerical screen keyboard opens. 240 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Limit value test of numerical values Operating a project 9.7 Input Tags can be assigned limit values. If you enter a value that lies outside of this limit, it will not be accepted, for example, 80 with a limit value of 78. In this case the HMI device will deliver a system alarm, if an alarm window is configured. The original value is displayed again. Decimal places for numerical values The configuration engineer can define the number of decimal places for a numerical text box. The number of decimal places is checked when you enter a value in this type of I/O field. Decimal places in excess of the limit are ignored Empty decimal places are filled with "0"
Procedure Numerical values can be entered character-by-character via the buttons on the numerical screen keyboard. Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the desired operating element within the screen. The numerical screen keyboard opens. The existing value is displayed in the screen keyboard and is selected. 2. Enter the value. When entering hexadecimal values, the keys with letters "G" to "Z" are operable, but the characters will not be entered. You have the following options to enter a value:
The selected value is deleted when you enter the first character. Completely reenter the value. Use the and keys to move the cursor within the current value. You can key to delete the character to the left of the cursor. If the value is now edit the characters of the current value or add characters. Use the selected, use this key to delete the selected part of the value. The selected, use this key to delete the selected part of the value. key deletes the character positioned to the right of the cursor. If the value is Use the key to display the infotext of the I/O field. This key is only enabled if infotext has been configured for the input object or the current screen. 3. Use the key to confirm your entry or cancel it with
. Either action closes the screen keyboard. Result You have changed the numerical value or entered a new one. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 241 Operating a project 9.7 Input 9.7.3 Entering and editing alphanumerical values Alphanumerical screen keyboard When you touch an operating element for numerical input on the HMI-device touch screen, the alphanumerical screen keyboard appears. This is the case, for example, for a text box. The screen keyboard is automatically hidden again when input is complete. Figure 9-2 Alphanumerical screen keyboard, normal level Note Opened screen keyboard When the screen keyboard is open, PLC job 51, "Select screen" has no function. Language change Language change in the project has no influence on the alphanumerical screen keyboard. The entry of Cyrillic or Asian chracters is therefore not possible. Keyboard levels Procedure The alphanumerical screen keyboard has various levels. Normal level Shift level If you change the levels with key
, the key assignments change. Alphanumerical values can be entered character-by-character via the buttons on the alphanumerical screen keyboard. Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the desired operating element within the screen. The alphanumerical screen keyboard opens. The existing value is displayed in the screen keyboard and is selected. 2. Enter the value. You have the following options to enter a value:
242 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Operating a project 9.7 Input The selected value is deleted when you enter the first character. Completely reenter the value. Use the and keys to move the cursor within the current value. You can key to delete the character to the left of the cursor. If the value is now edit the characters of the current value or add characters. Use the selected, use this key to delete the selected part of the value. The selected, use this key to delete the selected part of the value. key deletes the character positioned to the right of the cursor. If the value is Using key keyboard. On switchover, the key assignments of the screen keyboard change. it is possible to switch between the keyboard levels of the screen Use the key to display the infotext of the I/O field. This key is only enabled if infotext has been configured for the input object or the current screen. 3. Use the key to confirm your entry or cancel it with
. Either action closes the screen keyboard. Result You have changed the alphanumeric value or entered a new one. 9.7.4 Entering the date and time Entering the date and time Enter the date and time in the same way you enter alphanumerical values. Note When entering the date and time, please note that the format is determined by the configured project language. See also Entering and editing alphanumerical values (Page 242) Setting the project language (Page 238) Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 243 Operating a project 9.8 Displaying infotext 9.7.5 Entering symbolic values Drop down list box Operating elements for entering symbolic values offer you a list from which you can select the input values. When you touch a symbolic I/O field on the HMI device touch screen, the following drop down list box opens. Figure 9-3 Symbolic I/O field after touch, example Procedure Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the required operating element. The drop down list box of the operating element opens. Select drop down list box. and to scroll in the 2. Touch the required entry in the drop down list box. The selected entry is accepted as an entry. Result You have changed the symbolic value or entered a new one. 9.8 Displaying infotext Purpose The configuration engineer uses infotext to provide additional information and operating instructions. The configuration engineer can configure infotext on screens and operating elements. The infotext of an I/O field may contain, for example, information on the value to be entered. 244 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Operating a project 9.8 Displaying infotext Figure 9-4 Infotext for an I/O field, example Opening infotext for operating elements 1. Touch the required operating element. The screen keyboard opens. You can see from the appearance of the infotext has been configured for the operating element or the current screen. key whether 2. Touch the key on the screen keyboard. The infotext for the operating element is displayed. If there is no infotext for the selected screen object, the infotext for the current screen is displayed, if it has been configured. You can scroll through the contents of long infotext with and
. Note Switching between displayed infotext The configuration engineer can configure infotext for an I/O field and the associated screen. You can switch between two infotexts by touching the infotext window. 1. Close the displayed infotext by pressing
. Alternative procedure Depending on your configuration, infotext can also be called via a configured operating element. Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 245 Operating a project 9.9 Device-specific displays 9.9 Device-specific displays 9.9.1 Displaying battery status Application Layout The "Battery" object indicates the charging status of the main battery. Charge the battery in good time. Alternatively, change the main battery. Symbol Color Green Yellow Red Meaning The battery is sufficiently charged. Charging status
>20 %
The battery is weak. The battery must be charged. Alternatively, insert a charged spare battery. Battery is very weak. The battery must be charged. Alternatively, insert a charged spare battery. 10 % to 20 %
<10 %
Operation The object is for display only and cannot be operated. 9.9.2 Displaying WLAN quality The "WLAN quality" object displays the signal strength of the WLAN wireless connection. The HMI device measures the signal strength and indicates the quality using 5 bars. Application Layout 246 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Operating a project 9.9 Device-specific displays Symbol Meaning No wireless connection Signal strength No signal Very poor wireless connection 20 %
Poor wireless connection Wireless connection OK Good wireless connection 40 %
>20 %
60 %
>40 %
80 %
>60 %
Very good wireless connection
>80 %
Operation The "WLAN quality" object is purely for display purposes. You cannot operate the "WLAN quality" object. 9.9.3 Displaying the effective range name The "Effective range name" object indicates the following:
Name of the effective range in which the HMI device is currently located. Logon status Application Layout Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 247 Operating a project 9.9 Device-specific displays Symbol Description The HMI device is within the effective range shown. The HMI device is not logged onto the effective range. The enabling button is not active. The HMI device is within the effective range shown and is logged onto the effective range. Using the enabling buttons, safe operation in the effective range is possible
. The HMI device is within the effective range shown. The enabling button is not active. The HMI device is outside all of the effective ranges. The enabling button is not active. Logon It is possible to log onto the effective range. The HMI device is logged onto the effective range. Logon to the effective range is rejected because a different HMI device is already logged on. Note:
When using the "Override" mode:
Although no other HMI device is still logged on to the effective range, logon is rejected because the override switch is still set. It is not possible to log onto the effective range. Note: You can only log on within the effective range See also Logging onto and off from the effective range (Page 224) 9.9.4 Displaying the effective range quality Application Layout 248 The "Effective range quality" object indicates how accurately the Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN is still within an effective range. In contrast to the "WLAN quality" object, the HMI device does not measure signal strength. The HMI device calculates the effective range quality on the basis of the distance between it and the assigned transponders. The "Effective range quality" is then also updated if the HMI device is not logged onto the effective range. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Operating a project 9.9 Device-specific displays Meaning The HMI device is in the middle of the effective range. Quality
>15 %
The HMI device is at the limits of an effective range. 1% to 15%
The HMI device is not within the effective range. 0 %
Symbol
"Override" mode is active. The distance of the HMI device to the transponders is not evaluated. "Override" mode (Page 226) The "Effective range name" object indicates which effective range this concerns. Calculating the quality The quality within an effective range depends on the measured distance to the transponder, as shown below:
In the center of the effective range the quality is 100%. The quality decreases as you approach the limits of the effective range. On the transponder and on the border of the effective range, the quality is 0%. Operation The object is for display only and cannot be operated. 9.9.5 Displaying zone names Application Layout The "Zone name" object shows the names of the zone in which the HMI device is currently located. Symbol Meaning The HMI device is within the indicated zone. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 249 Operating a project 9.9 Device-specific displays Symbol Meaning The HMI device is not inside any zone. Operation The "Zone name" object is purely for display purposes. You cannot operate the "Zone name"
object. 9.9.6 Displaying zone quality Application Layout The "Zone quality" object shows how close the HMI device is to the limits of a zone. Unlike with "WLAN quality", the HMI device does not measure signal strength. The HMI device calculates the zone quality from the distance between it and the assigned transponders. Symbol Meaning The HMI device is within a zone. Quality
>15 %
The HMI device is at the limits of a zone. 1% to 15%
The HMI device is not within any zone. 0 %
The "Zone quality" object indicates which zone this concerns. Calculating the quality The quality within a zone depends on the measured distance to the transponder:
In the center of the zone the quality is 100%
The quality decreases as you approach the limits of the zone On the transponder and on the border of the zone, the quality is 0%
250 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Operation Operating a project 9.10 Bar and gauge The "Zone quality" object is purely for display purposes. You cannot operate the "Zone quality" object. 9.10 Bar and gauge Bar The bar is a dynamic display object. The bar displays a value from the PLC as a rectangular area. The bar allows you to recognize the following at a glance:
The distance of the current value from the configured limit values Whether a set point value has been reached The bar can display values such as fill levels or batch counts. Layout Gauge The layout of the bar depends on the configuration:
The bar may feature a scale of values The configured limit values can be indicated by lines Color changes can signal when a limit value has been exceeded or has not been reached The gauge is a dynamic display object. The gauge displays numerical values in analog form by means of a pointer. This enables an operator at the HMI device to see at a glance if the boiler pressure is in the normal range, for example. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 251 Operating a project 9.11 Operating the slider control Layout The layout of the gauge depends on the configuration:
A trailing pointer can display the maximum value reached so far on the scale. The trailing pointer is reset when the screen is reloaded The label on the scale can show the measured variable, for example boiler pressure and the physical unit, for example bar Operation The bar and the gauge are for display only. Both objects cannot be controlled by the operator. 9.11 Operating the slider control Introduction The slider control can be used to monitor and change process values within a defined range. The slider control can also be configured without a slider. In this case, you cannot enter a value. The slider control is then only used for displaying values.
Figure 9-5 Slider control example Slider control for entering values Value display with current value The layout of the slider control depends on the configuration:
The slider control can contain a label and a setting range The current value can be displayed below the area of the slider control Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Layout 252 Procedure Operating a project 9.12 Operating the switch Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the slider of the desired slider control. 2. Move the slider to the required value. If a value display has been configured, you can check the exact value that has been set. 3. Release the slider. Result The set value is applied. 9.12 Operating the switch Introduction Layout The switch is an operating element and display object with two predefined switching states, for example "On" and "Off". Switches can signalize the state of a plant section, for example if a motor is running or not. At the same time, you can use the switch to change the state of the corresponding plant section via the HMI device, for example from "On" to "Off". The layout of the switch depends on the configuration:
Switch with slider The two states are displayed by the position of the slider
Slider Switch with text or graphic The two states are displayed by the label on the slider Depending on the switching state, the switch is labeled with one of two texts or one of two graphics. Examples:
"Backward" or "Forward"
or Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 253 Operating a project 9.13 Operating the trend view Procedure Switch with slider Proceed as follows:
Move the slider to the other position or double-click the slider area Switch with text or graphic Proceed as follows:
Touch the switch Result The switch changes its appearance. The associated value is switched. 9.13 Operating the trend view Trends Trend view Trends continuously display the current process data or process data from a log. Trends are displayed in the trend view. A trend view can display several trends simultaneously.
Figure 9-6 Trend view, example
Ruler Buttons for trend operation Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 254 Operating a project 9.13 Operating the trend view Trend value in the value table Layout and operation The layout and operation of the trend view depends on the configuration. The configuration engineer determines, for example, the following:
Appearance of the trend view, the axes, value ranges and labels Operating options of the trend view Limit values for the trend values The change of color of the trend in the event of limit violation Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there. The trend values can be read from the value table if this is configured:
When the ruler is displayed, the trend values are shown at a position of the ruler in the value table When the ruler is hidden, the latest trend values are displayed in the value table When configured, a ruler is available to provide an exact reading of the trend values in the value table. You can move the ruler to the desired position of the trend view. The trend view can be operated as follows:
Enlarge or reduce the time interval displayed Scroll forward or back by one display width Stop and resume trend recording Move the ruler Hide and display the ruler The following table shows the trend view buttons:
Buttons Functions Stops or continues trend recording. Enlarges the displayed time section. Reduces the displayed time section. Scrolls one display width backwards (to the left) Scrolls one display width forwards (to the right) Value table Ruler Operation Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 255 Operating a project 9.14 Operating the Status Force Buttons Functions Scrolls back to the beginning of the trend recording. The start values of the trend recording are displayed there. Moves the ruler backwards (to the left) Moves the ruler forwards (to the right) Shows or hides the ruler. In addition, the configuration engineer can configure function keys or operating elements with which you can control trend views. Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there. Touch operation Touch the required button in the trend view. The position of the ruler can also be changed by means of touching and dragging the ruler on the touch screen. Procedure using the keys Proceed as follows:
1. Using the key TAB select the desired button within the trend view. 2. Confirm your entry by pressing the key ENTER . 9.14 Operating the Status Force 9.14.1 Overview Application You read or write access values of the connected PLC directly with Status Force. Status force allows you to monitor or change addresses of the PLC program, etc. You don't need to connect an additional programming device or additional PC to the PLC. Note Status force can only be used in combination with SIMATIC S7. The layout of Status Force depends on the configuration. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Layout 256 Operating a project 9.14 Operating the Status Force The figure shows the general layout of Status Force. A value can be monitored or controlled on every line. Figure 9-7 Status Force, example The configuration engineer specifies which columns appear in Status Force. The table shows the significance of all configurable columns. Functions The PLC whose address ranges must be displayed. The address range of the value Column
"Connection"
"Type", "DB Number", "Offset",
"Bit"
"Data type", "Format"
"Status value"
"Control value"
Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there. The data type of the value The value read from the specified address. The value to be written to the specified address. Operator controls Depending on your configuration, you can operate the trend view using the following buttons:
Functions
"Read" button Updates the display in the "Status value" column. This button engages when it is pressed. You cannot operate any text boxes until the button is actuated again and the refresh is stopped.
"Write" button Applies the new value in the "Control value" column. The control value is written to the PLC. Buttons Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 257 Operating a project 9.14 Operating the Status Force 9.14.2 Operation Operator input options Status Force can be operated as follows:
Change the column sequence Read the status values of the connected PLC Enter values and transfer them to the PLC Change column sequence Depending on the configuration, you can change the column sequence of Status Force. Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the column header which you wish to exchange with a different column header 2. Keeping the touch screen pressed, move the column heading to the column heading you wish to exchange it with Result The columns are displayed in the modified sequence. Procedure for reading the status value Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the address and the desired format of a value for each line. Touch the respective columns to display the screen keyboard. 2. Once you have entered all of the desired values, touch the button. Result All values are read cyclically by the PLC and entered in the "Status value" column until the button is touched again. Requirements for forcing The following requirements must be fulfilled in order to force values:
The "Control value" column must be available The "Write" button must be available Procedure for forcing a value Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the address of a value for each line. Enter the desired value in the "Control value"
column. Touch the respective columns to display the screen keyboard. 258 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Result Operating a project 9.15 Operating the Sm@rtClient view 2. Once you have entered all of the desired values, touch the button. The values from the "Control value" column are transferred once to the PLC. 9.15 Operating the Sm@rtClient view 9.15.1 Overview Application The Sm@rtClient view enables you to monitor and remotely operate the current project of a remote HMI device. With the correct configuration, several equal priority HMI devices can access a remote HMI device. Note If another HMI device accesses your HMI device via the Sm@rtClient view, this leads to an additional load on your HMI device. Layout In the Sm@rtClient view, the remote HMI is displayed with the complete layout. Depending on the configuration, you can monitor and also operate this screen. You can also operate the function keys like buttons on an HMI device with a touch screen. On a Sm@rtClient view which is configured for monitoring mode, you can only monitor the remote HMI device. You cannot control its operation. Note It is not possible to operate the direct keys of the remote HMI device from the local HMI device. The available operator controls depend on the HMI devices used:
Same type of HMI devices Monitoring mode Operation Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 259 Operating a project 9.15 Operating the Sm@rtClient view You can operate the project of the remote HMI device with the operator controls of your HMI device Operate keys from a local touch screen All the keys of the remote HMI device are displayed as buttons on the touch screen. You can also touch them to operate them Touch operation from a local HMI device using keys You operate the buttons in the usual manner. 9.15.2 Operation Operator input options The Sm@rtClient view can be operated as follows:
Starting remote control Forcing permission Ending remote control Procedure for starting remote control Proceed as follows:
1. On the HMI device change to the screen with the Sm@rtClient view. The following options are available for establishing the connection to the remote HMI device:
The connection is established automatically. The connection must be established by touching the appropriate button. Depending on the configuration, you may be required to enter the address of the remote HMI device and a password. 2. The current screen of the project running on the remote device is displayed on the screen of your HMI device. 3. You can now monitor and control this screen depending on your configuration. Scroll bars are displayed if the screen of the remote HMI device is larger than that of the current HMI device. Procedure for forcing permission If several HMI devices have access to a HMI device, only one HMI device has operating permission at any one time. Two cases must be distinguished for this case:
If another HMI device is already controlling the remote HMI device, if configured accordingly, you can force operating permission for the remote HMI device You are trying to operate the remote HMI device 260 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Operating a project 9.16 Project security A dialog appears in which you are prompted to enter the appropriate password for forcing remote control You are now authorized to operate the remote HMI device If another HMI device is accessing your HMI device via the Sm@rtClient view, you can force local operating permission for your HMI device Touch the screen of your HMI device five times consecutively You are given permission to operate your local HMI device Procedure for ending remote control You can end monitoring and control of a remote HMI device with one of the following methods depending on the configuration:
Touch a button configured for this action Exit the screen containing the Sm@rtClient view If configured, a menu is displayed after you have touched an empty space over a longer period. Select the "Close" menu item. Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there. 9.16 Project security 9.16.1 Overview Design of the security system The configuration engineer can protect the operation of a project by implementing a security system. The security system is based on authorizations, user groups and users. If operating elements protected by a password are pressed, the HMI device first requests that you log on. A logon screen is displayed in which you enter your user name and password. After logging on, you can press the operating elements for which you have the necessary authorizations. The logon dialog can be set up by the configuration engineer via an individual operating element. In the same way, the configuration engineer can set up an operating element to log off. After logging off, objects assigned password protection can no longer be operated; to do so, log on again. Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 261 Operating a project 9.16 Project security Central user administration using SIMATIC Logon Users, user groups and authorizations can be stored on a central server. If user administration cannot contact the server, an error message is displayed. If this is the case, you can only log on locally. Check whether additional information is available in your plant documentation. The operation of SIMATIC Logon differs as follows:
The simple user display is not supported Users cannot be deleted You cannot change your logout time When changing the password, you must enter it twice for security reasons The domain name is also indicated in the "User" field User groups and authorizations Project-specific user groups are created by the configuration engineer. The "Administrators"
and "PLC User" groups are included in all projects by default. User groups are assigned authorizations. Authorization required for an operation is specifically defined for each individual object and function in the project. Users and passwords Each user is assigned to exactly one user group. The following persons are allowed to create users and assign them passwords:
The configuration engineer during configuration The administrator on the HMI device A user with user management authorization on the HMI device Irrespective of the user group, each user is allowed to change his own password. Logoff times A logoff time is specified in the system for each user. If the time between any two user actions, such as entering a value or changing screens, exceeds this logoff time, the user is automatically logged off. The user must then log on again to continue to operate objects assigned password protection. Backup and restore Note Backup and restore is not available to central user administration with SIMATIC Logon. The user data is encrypted and saved on the HMI device to protect it from loss due to power failure. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 262 Operating a project 9.16 Project security The users, passwords, group assignments and logoff times set up on the HMI device can be backed up and restored. This prevents you having to enter all of the data again on another HMI device. NOTICE The currently valid user data is overwritten in the following cases:
Depending on the transfer settings, when the project is transferred again Upon restore of a backed-up project Upon import of the user administration via an operating element. Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there. The retransferred or restored user data and passwords are valid with immediate effect. Limits for user, password and user view Length of user name, maximum Length of password, minimum Length of password, maximum Entries in user view, maximum 9.16.2 User view Application Number of characters 40 3 24 50 The user view is used to display the users on the HMI device:
All users on the HMI device are displayed in the user view to the administrator or to a user with administrator authorizations If you are a user without user management authorization, you can only see your personal user entry The authorizations of a user after logging on depends on the user group to which the user is assigned. Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there. Layout The configuration engineer can implement a simple or extended user view. The two user views offer the same functions. They differ only in the display of information. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 263 Operating a project 9.16 Project security Simple user view If you are not logged on to the HMI device, the only entry contained in the simple user view is "<ENTER>". If you are logged on to the HMI device, the simple user view only displays the user name and user group. Extended user view The extended user view displays information about the users. The extended user view contains the following columns:
Users Password Group Logoff time The passwords are encrypted by appearing as asterisks. 9.16.3 User logon Logon dialog Use the logon dialog to log on to the security system of the HMI device. Enter your user name and password in the logon dialog. 264 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Operating a project 9.16 Project security The logon dialog opens in the following cases:
You press an operating element with password protection You press an operating element that was configured for displaying the logon dialog Select the "<ENTER>" entry in the simple user view Select a blank entry in the extended user view The logon dialog will be automatically displayed when the project is started, depending on the configuration Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there. Requirements The logon dialog is open. Procedure using the touch screen Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the user name and password. Touch the corresponding text box. The alphanumerical screen keyboard is displayed. 2. Select "OK" to confirm logon. Procedure using the keys Proceed as follows:
1. Using the key TAB select the "User" text box within the logon dialog. 2. Enter the user name using the system keys. To enter letters, switch the numerical keypad to letter assignment using the key A-Z . 3. Using the key TAB select the "Password" text box. 4. Enter the password using the system keys. 5. Touch the "OK" button to confirm your entries. Note The user name is not case-sensitive. The password is case-sensitive. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 265 Operating a project 9.16 Project security Result After successful logon to the security system, you can execute password-protected functions on the HMI device for which you have authorizations. If you enter a wrong password, an error message is displayed when an alarm window has been configured. 9.16.4 User logoff Requirements Procedure Result You have logged into the security system of the HMI device. You have the following options for logging off:
You press an operating element that was configured for logoff You will be logged off automatically if you are not operating the project and if the logoff time has been exceeded You will also be automatically logged off if you enter an incorrect password. You are no longer logged into the project. In order to activate an operating element with password protection, you must first log on again. 9.16.5 Creating users Requirements You have opened a screen containing the user view. You have user management authorization or you are the administrator. NOTICE The following characters cannot be used in passwords:
Blank Special characters * ? . % / \ ' "
Procedure for creating a user in the simple user view Proceed as follows:
266 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 1. Touch the "<New User>" entry in the user view. The following dialog opens:
Operating a project 9.16 Project security 1. Enter the desired user name and password. Touch the corresponding text box. The alphanumerical screen keyboard is displayed. 2. Touch the "OK" button. The following dialog opens:
1. Assign the user to a group. In order to do so, open the "Group" drop down list box by means of the and to scroll in the drop down list box. button. Select 2. Touch the required entry in the drop down list box. The selected entry is then accepted as input. 3. Touch the text box "Logoff time". The screen keyboard is displayed. 4. Enter a value between 0 and 60 for the logoff time in minutes. The value 0 stands for "no automatic logoff."
5. Touch the "OK" button to confirm your entries. Procedure for creating a user in the extended user view Proceed as follows:
1. Double-click the desired field in the blank line of the user view. The appropriate screen keyboard is displayed. 2. Enter the respective user data in the field:
Assign the user to one of the groups from the drop down list box. Enter a value between 0 and 60 for the logoff time in minutes. The value 0 stands for
"no automatic logoff."
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 267 Operating a project 9.16 Project security Result The new user is created. 9.16.6 Changing user data Requirements You have opened a screen containing the user view. Which data you are allowed to change depends on your authorization:
You are an administrator or a user with user management authorization. In these cases you are allowed to change the data for all the users on the HMI device in the user view:
User name Group assignment Password Logoff time You are a user without user management authorization. In this case you are only allowed to change your personal user data:
Password Logoff time, if configured Note You can only change the logoff time and password for the "Admin" user. You can only change the logoff time for the "PLC_User". This user is used for logging on via the PLC Procedure for changing user data in the simple user view Proceed as follows:
1. In the user view, touch the user whose user data you want to change 2. When entering the data, use exactly the same procedure as for creating a user Procedure for changing user data in the extended user view Proceed as follows:
1. In the user view, touch the user whose user data you want to change 2. When entering the data, use exactly the same procedure as for creating a user The user data for the user is changed. Result 268 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 9.16.7 Deleting users Requirements Operating a project 9.17 Closing the project You have opened a screen containing the user view. To delete a user, you must be an administrator or have user management authorization. Note The "Admin" and "PLC_User" users exist by default. These users cannot be deleted. Procedure Result To delete a user, delete the user name entered. The user has been deleted and may no longer log onto the project. 9.17 Closing the project Procedure Proceed as follows:
1. If "Override" mode has been activated, deactivate it. 2. If you are logged onto the effective range, log off from it. 3. Use the corresponding operating element object to close the project. Alternatively, press and hold the ON/OFF button for at least 4 seconds. The "Confirm removal" dialog box is displayed. 4. Press the enabling button to confirm the dialog box. The HMI device is removed. Wait for the Loader to open after you closed the project. Result The project is terminated. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 269 Operating alarms 10.1 Overview Alarms 10 Alarms indicate events and states on the HMI device which have occurred in the system, in the process or on the HMI device itself. A status is reported when it is received. An alarm could trigger one of the following alarm events:
Incoming Outgoing Acknowledge The configuration engineer defines which alarms must be acknowledged by the user. An alarm may contain the following information:
Date Time Alarm text Location of fault State Alarm class Alarm number Alarm group Diagnostics capability Alarm classes Alarms are assigned to various alarm classes:
Error Alarms in this class must always be acknowledged. Error alarms normally indicate critical errors within the plant such as "Motor temperature too high"
Operation Warning alarms usually indicate states of a plant such as "Motor switched on"
System Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 271 Operating alarms 10.2 Recognizing pending alarms System alarms indicate states or events which occur on the HMI device SIMATIC diagnostic alarms SIMATIC diagnostic alarms show states and events of the SIMATIC S7 or SIMOTION PLCs User-specific alarm classes The properties of this alarm class must be defined in the configuration Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there. Alarm groups Alarm buffer Alarm report Alarm log The configuration engineer can group alarms into alarm groups. When you acknowledge an individual alarm of an alarm group, you acknowledge all alarms which belong to the same alarm group. The alarm events are stored in an internal buffer. The size of this alarm buffer depends on the HMI device type. The configuration engineer can activate alarm reporting on the project. In this case, alarm events are output directly on the connected printer. The configuration engineer can define whether each individual alarm is logged. An alarm of this type is printed when the alarm events "Incoming" and "Outgoing" occur. If you want to print alarms of the "System" alarm class, you have to print the contents of the associated alarm buffer. For this case the configuration engineer has to configure an operating element for printing the alarm buffer. Alarm events are stored in an alarm log, provided this log file is configured. The capacity of the log file is limited by the storage medium and system limits. 10.2 Recognizing pending alarms You can recognize pending alarms that must be acknowledged by means of the alarm indicator. The alarm indicator is a graphic symbol indicating pending alarms or alarms requiring acknowledgment, depending on the configuration. The configuration determines whether an alarm has to be acknowledged or not. This is also defined by the alarm class which an alarm belongs to. 272 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Operating alarms 10.3 Displaying alarms Figure 10-1 Alarm indicator with three pending alarms The alarm indicator flashes as long as alarms are pending for acknowledgment. The number displayed indicates the number of pending alarms. The configuration engineer can assign functions to be executed when the alarm indicator is operated. Usually, the alarm indicator is only used for error alarms. Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there. 10.3 Displaying alarms Displaying alarms Alarm view Alarms are displayed in the alarm view or in the alarm window on the HMI device. Depending on the configuration, the alarm view is displayed as follows:
As a single line. Alarm numbers and alarm texts are displayed as single lines As simple alarm view As extended alarm view In the simple or extended alarm views the configuration engineer specifies the alarm information to be displayed. Depending on the configuration, alarms from alarm logs are also displayed in the alarm view. Simple alarm view
The buttons have the following functions:
Buttons Functions Displaying infotext for an alarm. Process alarm. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 273 Operating alarms 10.3 Displaying alarms Buttons Functions Acknowledge alarm. Select the next or previous alarm in the list. Scroll one page up or down. Extended alarm view
The buttons have the following functions:
Buttons Functions Displaying infotext for an alarm. Process alarm. Acknowledge alarm. Changing the column sequence and sorting in the extended alarm view Depending on the configuration, you can change the column sequence and sorting order on HMI devices with touch operation. Change column sequence Touch the column header which you wish to exchange with a different column header Keeping the touch screen pressed, move the column heading to the column heading you wish to exchange it with Change sorting order To change the sorting order of the alarms, touch the respective column header on the touch screen Alarm class layout 274 The various alarm classes are identified in order to distinguish between them in the alarm view. Symbol
Without a symbol Symbol depending on the configuration User-defined alarm classes S7 Alarm class Error Operation SIMATIC or SIMOTION diagnostic alarms Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Operating alarms 10.4 Display infotexts for an alarm Symbol
The configuration engineer can change the symbols for the alarm classes. Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there. Alarm class System Alarm window The alarm window is independent of the process screen. Depending on the configuration, the alarm window opens automatically as soon as a new alarm is pending for acknowledgment. The alarm window can be configured so that it only closes after all the alarms have been acknowledged. The layout and the operation of the alarm window are the same as for the alarm view. Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there. 10.4 Display infotexts for an alarm Displaying infotext The configuration engineer can also provide infotext for alarms. Procedure Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the desired alarm in the alarm view or the alarm window. The alarm is selected. 2. Touch the button in the simple alarm view or in the extended alarm view. If configured, the infotext assigned to this alarm is displayed. 3. Close the screen for displaying the infotext by means of the button. See also Displaying alarms (Page 273) 10.5 Acknowledge alarm Requirements The alarm to be acknowledged is displayed in the alarm window or the alarm view. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 275 Operating alarms 10.6 Edit alarm Procedure Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the desired alarm in the alarm view or the alarm window. The alarm is selected. 2. Touch the button in the simple alarm view or in the extended alarm view. Alternative operation Depending on the configuration, you can also acknowledge an alarm with a function key. Result The alarm is acknowledged. If the alarm belongs to an alarm group, all the alarms of the associated group are acknowledged. Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on acknowledgment and available alarm groups is available there. 10.6 Edit alarm Introduction The configuration engineer can assign additional functions to each alarm. These functions are executed when the alarm is processed. Note When you edit an unacknowledged alarm, it is acknowledged automatically. Requirements Procedure Result 276 The alarm to be edited is displayed in the alarm window or the alarm view. Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the desired alarm in the alarm view or the alarm window. The alarm is selected. 2. Touch the button in the simple alarm view or in the extended alarm view. The system executes the additional functions of the alarm. Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Operating recipes 11.1 Overview Introduction 11 Recipes are used when different variants of a product are manufactured with the same process. In this case, the product variants differ in terms of their type and quantity of the components, but not in terms of the manufacturing process sequence. The configuration engineer can store the combination of each individual product variant in a recipe. Field of application Recipes can be used everywhere the same product components are used in variable combinations to create different product variants. Examples:
Beverage industry Food processing industry Pharmaceutical industry Paint industry Building materials industry Steel industry 11.2 Structure of a recipe Recipes The recipe collection for the production of a product family can be compared to a file cabinet. A recipe which is used to manufacture a product corresponds to a drawer in a file cabinet. Example:
In a plant for producing fruit juice, recipes are required for different flavors. There is a recipe, for example, for the flavors orange, grape, apple and cherry. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 277 Operating recipes 11.2 Structure of a recipe
File cabinet Drawer Drawer Drawer Drawer Recipe collection Recipe Recipe Recipe Recipe Recipes for a fruit juice plant Orange flavored drinks Grape flavored drinks Apple flavored drinks Cherry flavored drinks Recipe data records The drawers of the file cabinet are filled with suspension folders. The suspension folders in the drawers represent records required for manufacturing various product variants. Example:
Product variants of the flavor apple might be a soft drink, a juice or nectar, for example.
278 Drawer Suspension folder Suspension folder Recipe Recipe data record Recipe data record Product variants of apple flavored drinks Apple drink Apple nectar Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Elements Operating recipes 11.3 Recipes in the project Suspension folder Recipe data record Apple juice In the figure showing the file cabinet, each suspension folder contains the same number of sheets. Each sheet in the suspension folder corresponds to an element of the recipe data record. All the records of a recipe contain the same elements. The records differ, however, in the value of the individual elements. Example:
All drinks contain the same components: water, concentrate, sugar and flavoring. The records for soft drink, fruit juice or nectar differ, however, in the quantity of sugar used in production. 11.3 Recipes in the project Overview If recipes are used in a project, the following components interact:
Recipe view / recipe screen On the HMI device, recipes are displayed and edited in the recipe view or in a recipe screen. The recipe data records from the internal memory of the HMI device are displayed and edited in the recipe view. The values of the recipe tags are displayed and edited in the recipe screen. Depending on the configuration, the values displayed in the recipe view are synchronized with the values of recipe tags. HMI device recipe memory Recipes are saved in the form of data records in the HMI device recipe memory. The recipe data can also be saved in recipe tags. Recipe tags The recipe tags contain recipe data. When you edit recipes in a recipe screen, the recipe values are stored in recipe tags. Depending on the configuration, the values of the recipe tags are exchanged with the PLC. The recipe tags can be synchronized with the recipe data records so that the same values are saved in both. Memory card The memory card is an external storage medium for recipe data records. The recipe data records are exported from the HMI device recipe memory and are saved on the memory card in a *.csv file. The records can be reimported from the memory card to the recipe memory. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 279 Operating recipes 11.4 Recipe displays Data flow The following figure shows the data flow in a project with recipes.
Editing, saving or deleting a recipe data record Display recipe data record Synchronize or do not synchronize recipe tags Display and edit recipe tags in the recipe screen Write records from the recipe view to the PLC or read records from the PLC and display them in the recipe view Recipe tags are sent to the PLC online or offline Export or import recipe data record to memory card 11.4 Recipe displays Displaying recipes You can display and edit recipes on the HMI device with a recipe view or recipe screen. Recipe view 280 A recipe view is a screen object used to manage recipe data records. The recipe view shows recipe data records in tabular form. Depending on the configuration, the recipe view is displayed as follows:
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Operating recipes 11.4 Recipe displays As extended recipe view As simple recipe view The configuration engineer also defines which operator controls are displayed in the recipe view. Extended recipe view The following figure shows an example of the extended recipe view.
Selection box for the recipe Selection box for the recipe data record Element name The element name designates a specific element in the recipe data record Display field This show the number of the selected recipe or the selected recipe data record Value of the element Buttons for editing a recipe data record Status bar for display of the status messages Simple recipe view The simple recipe view consists of three areas:
Recipe list Data record list Element list In the simple recipe view, each area is shown separately on the HMI device. Depending on the configuration, the simple recipe view starts with the recipe list or data record list. The following figure shows an example of the record list. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 281 Operating recipes 11.4 Recipe displays
Number of the recipe data record Recipe data records Buttons for changing the displayed list and calling the menu Display of values Recipe screen NOTICE Changing the recipe data record in the background Applies to the processing of a recipe data record:
If values of the corresponding recipe data record are changed by a PLC job, the recipe view is not updated automatically. To update the recipe view, reselect the respective recipe data record. A recipe screen allows the correlation between the plant and the recipe data to be displayed in graphic form. The configuration engineer combines I/O fields and screen objects to form a custom input screen. The configuration engineer can distribute the I/O fields of a recipe over several recipe screens, thus allowing recipe elements to be arranged by subject. The recipe screen can be operated using buttons configured accordingly. The following figure shows an example of the recipe screen.
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 282 Operating recipes 11.5 Recipe values in the HMI device and the PLC Element name and associated values The element name designates a specific element in the recipe data record Buttons for editing a recipe data record Modified recipe view Buttons for transferring recipe data The values displayed or entered in the recipe screen are saved in recipe tags. The recipe values are exchanged with the PLC immediately or later via these tags. A configured recipe view can itself be a component of a recipe screen You must synchronize the tags in order to synchronize data between the tags of the recipe screen and the recipe data records displayed in the recipe view. Synchronization of tags is only possible in the extended recipe view. Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there. 11.5 Recipe values in the HMI device and the PLC Introduction You can change the values of a recipe on the HMI device and therefore influence the manufacturing process or a machine. Depending on the configuration, the recipe values are displayed, edited and saved in different ways:
If you are editing recipes with a recipe view in your project, the values are saved in recipe data records If you are editing recipes in a recipe screen in your project, the values are saved in recipe tags Differences may occur between the display values in the recipe view and the values saved in the associated tags in an ongoing project when you edit recipes with a recipe view and in a recipe screen. To prevent this, the recipe data record values must be synchronized with the values of the recipe tags. You have however the option to perform synchronization operations at any time. Synchronization only takes place if the configuration engineer has activated the respective settings for a recipe. Note Recipe tags can only be synchronized in the extended recipe view. Synchronizing recipe tags Synchronization of the recipe tags depends on the configuration:
Automatic synchronization:
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 283 Operating recipes 11.6 Operating the recipe view The values of the recipe view are synchronized with the associated recipe tags. In this case, changes to values in the recipe view have an immediate effect on the values of the associated recipe tags. The values are only synchronized, when an operating element that is outside the recipe view is operated. Synchronization by the user:
The values of the recipe view and the associated recipe tags are not synchronized automatically. The configuration engineer has assigned the same function to the button or a different operating element in the recipe view. The recipe tags and the recipe view are only synchronized when you operate the buttons or the appropriate operating element. Recipe tags online / offline The configuration engineer can configure a recipe so that changes to the values of the recipe tags do not have an immediate effect on the current process. Synchronization of the recipe values between the HMI device and the PLC depends on whether the configuration engineer has selected the settings "Tags online" or the setting
"Tags offline" for a recipe.
"Tags online":
This setting has the following effect:
When you change recipe values in the recipe screen, these changes are applied immediately by the PLC and immediately influence the process If recipe values are changed in the PLC, the changed values are displayed immediately in the recipe screen
"Tags offline":
With this setting, changed recipe values are not synchronized immediately between the HMI device and the PLC In this case, the configuration engineer must configure operating elements for transferring the values to the PLC or reading them from the PLC in a recipe screen. The recipe values are only synchronized between HMI device and PLC when you operate the appropriate operating element 11.6 Operating the recipe view 11.6.1 Overview Operation The recipe view can be operated as follows:
Enter values for the recipe elements Create recipe data records 284 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Operating recipes 11.6 Operating the recipe view Save recipe data records or save them under a new name Delete recipe data records Synchronize values of the recipe view with the associated recipe tags Transfer recipe data records from the PLC and to the PLC Operator controls of the recipe view The following table shows the operator controls of the recipe view. Buttons Functions Creates a new recipe data record. If a start value is configured, it is shown in the text box. Saves the displayed values of the recipe data record. The storage location is predefined by the project. The recipe data record is saved under a different name irrespective of the recipe view. A dialog box opens in which the name is entered. The displayed recipe data record is deleted. The values of the recipe view are synchronized with the associated recipe tags. The values changed during editing are written to the associated recipe tags. Subsequently all the values of the tags are read out and updated in the table. The recipe values from the PLC are displayed in the recipe view. The values of the set recipe data record displayed in the recipe view are transferred to the PLC. Operating the recipe screen You operate the recipes in a recipe screen with the operator controls provided by the configuration engineer. Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there. 11.6.2 Creating a recipe data record Introduction Requirements You create a new recipe data record by modifying an existing record. You then save the modified data record under a new name. A screen with a recipe view is displayed. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 285 Operating recipes 11.6 Operating the recipe view Procedure Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe view contains several recipes: Select the recipe for which you want to create a new recipe data record. 2. Touch
. A new recipe data record with the next available number is created. If you change the new data record number to an existing data record number, the existing data record is overwritten. 3. Enter values for the elements of the data record. The elements of the recipe data record can be assigned default values depending on the configuration. 4. Touch 5. Enter a name for the data record. The data record is saved under the new name. If the recipe data record already exists, a dialog is opened. In this dialog, specify whether the existing data record is to be overwritten. Result See also The new recipe data record is saved to the selected recipe. Recipes in the project (Page 279) 11.6.3 Editing a recipe data record Introduction Edit the values of the recipe data records and save them in a recipe view. Synchronization with the PLC If you want to display the current recipe values from the PLC in the recipe view, you first have to read the current values from the PLC with The values changed in the recipe view only become effective when the amended data record is transferred to the PLC by means of the button. Requirements A screen with a recipe view is displayed. 286 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Operating recipes 11.6 Operating the recipe view Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe view contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the desired recipe data record. 2. Select the recipe data record you want to change. 3. Change the data record as required. 4. Save your changes by means of the button. If you want to save the recipe data record under a different name, touch the key. 5. The recipe data record is saved. The edited recipe data record has now been saved in the selected recipe. Procedure Result See also Recipes in the project (Page 279) 11.6.4 Deleting a recipe data record Introduction Requirements Procedure You can delete all the data records of a recipe which are not required. A screen with a recipe view is displayed. Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe view contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the desired recipe data record. 2. Select the recipe data record you want to delete. 3. Touch
. Result The recipe data record is deleted. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 287 Operating recipes 11.6 Operating the recipe view See also Recipes in the project (Page 279) 11.6.5 Synchronizing tags Introduction The values of the recipe elements can be saved to recipe tags, depending on the configuration. Differences may occur between the display values in the recipe view and the actual values of tags in an ongoing project. Synchronize the tags to equalize such differences. Synchronization always includes all the variables which belong to a recipe data record. NOTICE Changed tag name Tags and the value of the recipe data record cannot be assigned to each other if the tag name of the tag to be synchronized has been changed. The tags in question are not synchronized. Note Recipe tags can only be synchronized in the enhanced recipe view. A screen with a recipe view is displayed. Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe view contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the desired recipe data record. 2. Select the recipe data record you want to synchronize. 3. Touch
. The elements of the recipe data record are synchronized with the recipe tags. If the values of the recipe view and the tag do not match, the more current value is accepted. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Requirement Procedure Result 288 See also Recipes in the project (Page 279) 11.6.6 Reading a recipe data record from the PLC Operating recipes 11.6 Operating the recipe view Introduction Requirements Procedure Result See also In the current project, the values which are also stored in the recipes in the HMI device can be changed directly in the plant. This is the case, for example, if a valve was opened further directly at the plant than is stored in the recipe. The values of the recipe data records saved in the HMI device possibly no longer match the values in the PLC. To synchronize the recipe values, read the values from the PLC and display them in the recipe view. A screen with a recipe view is displayed. Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe view contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the desired recipe data record. 2. Select the recipe data record to which you want to apply the values from the PLC. 3. Touch
. The values are read from the PLC. 4. If you want to store the displayed values in the HMI device, touch the button. The values were read from the PLC, displayed on the HMI device and saved to the selected recipe data record. Recipes in the project (Page 279) Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 289 Operating recipes 11.7 Operating the simple recipe view 11.6.7 Transferring a recipe data record to the PLC Introduction Requirements Procedure Result See also In order for an edited recipe data record to take effect in the process, you must transfer the values to the PLC. The display values in the recipe view are always transferred to the PLC. A screen with a recipe view is displayed. Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe view contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the desired recipe data record. 2. Select the recipe data record whose values you want to transfer to the PLC. 3. Touch
. The display values in the recipe view were transferred to the PLC and take effect in the process. Recipes in the project (Page 279) 11.7 Operating the simple recipe view 11.7.1 Overview Introduction The simple recipe view consists of three areas:
Recipe list Data record list Element list You can use the context menu to operate each of these display areas. 290 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Operation Operating recipes 11.7 Operating the simple recipe view The simple recipe view can be operated as follows:
Enter values for the recipe elements Create recipe data records Save recipe data records or save them under a new name Delete recipe data records Transfer recipe data records from the PLC and to the PLC Operator controls of the simple recipe view Toggle between the display areas and the context menus to operate the simple recipe views. The following table shows the operation of the display area. Operation Touching an entry Functions The next lower display area opens. The next higher display area opens. The context menu of the display area opens. The following table shows the operation of the context menu. Operation Functions The menu is closed. The display area opens. Touch the menu command The menu command is executed. Context menus of the simple recipe view Recipe list Menu item New Displaying infotext Open Data record list Menu item New Delete Save as Rename Functions A new recipe data record is created for the selected recipe. If a start value is configured, it is shown in the text box. The infotext configured for the simple recipe view is displayed. The record list of the selected recipe opens. Functions A new recipe data record is created for the selected recipe. If a start value is configured, it is shown in the text box. The selected record is deleted. The selected record is saved under a different name irrespective of the simple recipe view. A dialog box opens in which the name is entered. The selected data record is renamed. A dialog box opens in which the name is entered. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 291 Operating recipes 11.7 Operating the simple recipe view Element list Menu item Save To PLC From PLC Save as Functions The selected record is saved. The displayed values of the selected data record are transferred from the HMI device to the PLC. The recipe values from the PLC are displayed on the HMI device in the recipe view. The selected data record is saved under a new name. A dialog box opens in which the name is entered. Operating the menu Touch the desired menu command. The command is executed. Operating the recipe screen You operate the recipes in a recipe screen with the operator controls provided by the configuration engineer. Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there. 11.7.2 Creating a recipe data record Introduction Requirements Procedure Create a new recipe data record in the recipe list or in the record list. Then enter the values for the new record in the element list and save the record. A screen with a simple recipe view is displayed. Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe list contains several recipes: Select the recipe for which you want to create a new recipe data record. 2. Open the recipe list menu. 3. Select the menu command "New". Creates a new record The element list of the new record opens. 4. Enter values for the elements of the data record. 292 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Operating recipes 11.7 Operating the simple recipe view The tags of the record can be assigned default values depending on the configuration. 5. Open the menu of the element list and select the command "Save". 6. Enter a name for the new record. 7. Confirm your entries. If you change the new data record number to an existing data record number, the existing data record is overwritten. The new recipe data record is saved to the selected recipe. Result See also Recipes in the project (Page 279) 11.7.3 Editing a recipe data record Introduction Edit the values of the recipe data records in a simple recipe view. Synchronization with the PLC If you want to display the current recipe values from the PLC in the simple recipe view, you first have to read the current values from the PLC with the menu command "From PLC" in the element list. The values changed in the recipe view only take effect in the PLC when you transfer the edited data record to the PLC with the menu command "To PLC". Requirements Procedure A screen with a simple recipe view is displayed. Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe list contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the desired recipe data record. 2. Open the data record list. 3. Select the recipe data record you want to change. 4. Open the element list. 5. Change the values of the records as required. 6. Save your changes with the menu command "Save". Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 293 Operating recipes 11.7 Operating the simple recipe view The recipe data record is saved. Result See also The edited recipe data record has now been saved in the selected recipe. Recipes in the project (Page 279) 11.7.4 Deleting a recipe data record Introduction Requirements Procedure You can delete all the data records which are not required. A screen with a simple recipe view is displayed. Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe list contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the desired recipe data record. 2. Open the data record list. 3. Select the data record you want to delete. 4. Open the menu. 5. Select the menu command "Delete". Result See also The data record is deleted. Recipes in the project (Page 279) 294 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Operating recipes 11.7 Operating the simple recipe view 11.7.5 Reading a recipe data record from the PLC Introduction Requirements Procedure Result See also The values of recipe elements are exchanged with the PLC via tags. In the current project, the values which are also stored in the recipes in the HMI device can be changed directly in the plant. This is the case, for example, if a valve was opened further directly at the plant than is stored in the recipe. The values of the tags on the HMI device possibly no longer match the values in the PLC. To synchronize the recipe values, read the values from the PLC and display them in the recipe view. A screen with a simple recipe view is displayed. Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe list contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the desired recipe data record. 2. Select the element list of the recipe data record to which you want to apply the values from the PLC. 3. Open the menu. 4. Select the menu item "From PLC". The values are read from the PLC. 5. If you want to save the displayed values in the HMI device, select the menu item "Save". The values were read from the PLC, displayed on the HMI device and saved to the selected recipe data record. Recipes in the project (Page 279) 11.7.6 Transferring a recipe data record to the PLC Introduction In order for an edited recipe data record to take effect in the process, you must transfer the values to the PLC. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 295 Operating recipes 11.8 Exporting a recipe data record The display values in the recipe view are always transferred to the PLC. Requirements Procedure Result See also A screen with a simple recipe view is displayed. Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe list contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the desired recipe data record. 2. Select the element list of the recipe data record whose values you want to transfer to the PLC. 3. Open the menu. 4. Select the menu item "To PLC". The values of the recipe data record were transferred to the PLC and take effect in the process. Recipes in the project (Page 279) 11.8 Exporting a recipe data record Introduction You can export one or more recipe data records to a CSV file, depending on the configuration. After export, the values in the recipe data record can be further processed in a spreadsheet program such as MS Excel. The degree to which you can influence the export depends on the configuration:
NOTICE Export of recipe data to USB memory stick not possible The USB interface is deactivated while the main battery is changed. Make sure that no recipe data is exported to a USB memory stick while the main battery is being changed. Requirements 296 A screen with a recipe view is displayed An operating element with the function "Export record" has been configured. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Procedure Operating recipes 11.9 Importing a recipe data record The following tags are configured equally in the recipe view and for the "Export record"
operating element. Recipe number Data record number Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe view contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the desired recipe data record. 2. Select the recipe data record you want to export. 3. Operate the operator control which was configured for export, for example the "Export data record" button. The data record is exported as a CSV file to an external data medium. Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there. Result The recipe data record is exported. 11.9 Importing a recipe data record Introduction Requirements Procedure You can import values from a CSV file to a recipe data record, depending on the configuration. An operating element with the function "Import data record" has been configured, for example a button A screen with a recipe view is displayed Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe view contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the recipe data record to be imported. 2. Operate the operating element with the function "Import data record". The record is imported from an external data medium as a CSV file and then displayed in the recipe view after import. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 297 Operating recipes 11.10 Examples Result The imported recipe data record is saved on the HMI device. Deviating structure If the structure of the CSV file differs from the structure of the recipe, deviations are handled as follows:
Any additional values in the CSV file will be rejected The system applies the configured default value to the recipe data record if the CSV file contains an insufficient number of values If the CSV file contains values of the wrong data type, the configured default value is set in the recipe data record Example:
The imported CSV file contains values that were entered as floating point numbers However, the corresponding tag expects an integer value. In this case, the system discards the imported value and uses the configured default 11.10 Examples 11.10.1 Entering a recipe data record Introduction Procedure You would like to enter production data on the HMI device without interrupting the process in the machine or plant. For this reason, the production data should not be transferred to the PLC. Proceed as follows:
1. Call the recipe view or a recipe screen. 2. Select the desired recipe data record. 3. Enter the values of the elements. 4. Save the recipe data record. The recipe data record is saved in the internal memory of the HMI device. The following figure shows the data flow schematically. 298 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Operating recipes 11.10 Examples
Display recipe data record Save recipe data record Tags are synchronized Display and edit recipe tags in the recipe screen Tags are offline 11.10.2 Manual production sequence Introduction Procedure You request the production data of different workpieces from the PLC and display this data on the screen of the HMI device for inspection. You want to correct the transferred production data in the recipe view or the recipe screen if necessary. A scanner connected to the PLC reads the barcode of a workpiece. The barcode names correspond to the names in the recipe data record. Based on the barcode name, the PLC can read the required recipe data record. The recipe data record is displayed for inspection on the HMI device. You can now edit and save the recipe data record. Then transfer the edited recipe data record to the PLC again. The following figure shows the data flow schematically. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 299 Operating recipes 11.10 Examples
The recipe data record is read from the PLC and written to the PLC again following changes Display and edit recipe tags in the recipe screen Tags are synchronized Recipe data records are saved in the recipe memory of the HMI device 300 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Maintenance and care 12.1 Maintenance and care Scope of maintenance Function tests 12 Carry out the specified tests in the periods of time prescribed for each. Otherwise, the functionality of the HMI device is not guaranteed. To perform the function tests, the HMI device must be switched on but not integrated. Press the emergency stop button at least once a year. Press both enabling buttons every time you start a project. HMI device The HMI device is designed for maintenance-free operation. The touch screen and keyboard overlay should nevertheless be cleaned regularly. Maintenance cycle of battery We recommend that you replace the battery when it can only be charged to 50%. This is the case after approximately 500 complete charging cycles. A charging cycle is complete when the battery is fully charged. Example:
The battery has a charging condition of 80%. It needs another 20% before it is fully charged. The battery is charged. This charging process counts as one fifth of a complete charging cycle. Transponder batteries Replace the transponder batteries at least every 5 years. Cleaning the HMI device CAUTION Inadvertent operation Always switch off the HMI device before cleaning it. This will ensure that you do not trigger unintended functions when you touch the keys. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 301 Maintenance and care 12.2 Spare parts and repairs CAUTION Do not clean the HMI device with compressed air or steam jet blowers. Never use aggressive solvents or scouring powder. Use a cleaning cloth dampened with a cleaning agent to clean the equipment. Only use water with a little liquid soap or a screen cleaning foam. Procedure Proceed as follows:
1. Switch off the HMI device. 2. Spray the cleaning solution onto a cleaning cloth. Do not spray directly onto the HMI device. 3. Clean the HMI device. When cleaning the display wipe from the screen edge inwards. 12.2 Spare parts and repairs Repairs In case of repair, the HMI device must be shipped to the Return Center in Frth. Repairs may only be carried out at the Return Center in Frth. Depending on the work necessary to repair the device, the Center may decide to give you a credit note. In this case, it is your responsibility to order a new device. The address is:
A&D Return Center Siemensstr. 2 90766 Frth, Germany Service pack A service pack can be ordered for servicing purposes. The service pack includes:
For the HMI device Cover caps Battery compartment cover Bridging battery For the charging station Covers for the battery compartment in the charging station. 302 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Maintenance and care 12.2 Spare parts and repairs Lock Key set for lock Counterpart for power supply connector The service pack can be ordered from your Siemens representative. Replacement key set You can order a replacement key set for the HMI device from your Siemens sales office. Replacement batteries Main batteries and bridge batteries can be ordered from your Siemens sales office. Service & Support on the Internet Service & Support provides additional comprehensive information on SIMATIC products through online services at "http://www.siemens.com/automation/support". Information about on-site services, repairs, spare parts, and much more is available on our
"Services" pages. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 303 Technical specifications 13.1 Dimension drawings 13.1.1 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Front view 13
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 305 Technical specifications 13.1 Dimension drawings Side view
306
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 13.1.2 Charging station Technical specifications 13.1 Dimension drawings
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 307
Technical specifications 13.2 Specifications 13.1.3 Transponder
13.2 Specifications 13.2.1 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN HMI device Display 308 Weight with battery and without packaging Max. 2.2 kg Type Display area, active Resolution Color TFT LC display 151.66 mm x 113.74 mm (7.5") 640 x 480 pixels Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Technical specifications 13.2 Specifications Colors, displayable Brightness control Back-lighting Half Brightness Life Time, typical Pixel error class according to DIN EN ISO 13406-
2 64k colors Yes CCFL 50,000 h II Input unit Type Function keys Enabling button Emergency off button (optional) ON/OFF button Handwheel (optional) Key-operated switch (optional) Illuminated pushbutton (optional) Touch screen, analog, resistive Membrane keyboard 18, with LEDs 1 1 1 1 50 pulses per rotation 1 3 switch settings 2 LED separately controllable Memory Ports Supply voltage Application memory 6 MB 1 x USB 1 x WLAN 1 x RS 45 Supply voltage About USB host; conforms to USB standard 1.1
(supporting low-speed and full-speed USB devices) Maximum load 100 mA For PROFINET WLAN For PROFINET LAN Battery Charging station Tabletop power supply unit Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 309 Technical specifications 13.2 Specifications Additional specifications Drop height with main battery Buffer time of internal clock with bridging battery inserted Radio link to transponder Frequency band Transmission angle Max. 1.2 m Approx. 4 days 2400 - 2483 MHz Approx. 83 Fail-safe mode WARNING The safety characteristics in the specifications apply for a proof-test interval of 10 years and a mean repair time of 8 hours. 310 In accordance with IEC 61508 Hardware architecture Hardware error tolerance Safe failure fraction Diagnostic test interval Request rate High demand (PFH: probability of a dangerous failure per hour) Maximum achievable safety class (SIL) Useful life In accordance with DIN EN ISO 13849-1 Mean time to failure (MTTFd) Meantime to Restoration (MTTR) Diagnostic coverage (DC) Performance level (PL) Safety category In accordance with EN 954-1 Safety category Other safety-related values Reaction time Discrepancy time Emergency stop Enabling button position "Enable"
Enabling button position "Panic"
Redundant 1oo2d 1 99,5 %
10 years High demand mode 8,12E-11 1/h 3 10 years 1679 years 8 hours 99 %
e 4 4
500 ms 2 sec 1 sec Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Technical specifications 13.2 Specifications Quantity structure for the effective range concept F-FBs required in safety program F_FB_MP F_FB_RNG_4 F_FB_RNG_16 DB_STATES 1x per Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN, maximum 126 1x per effective range, for which up to 4 HMI devices have logging on authorization 1x per effective range, for which up to 16 HMI devices have logging on authorization 1 Configuring Maximum number of transponders used in the project for effective ranges Maximum number of effective ranges in the project Maximum number of transponders per effective range Maximum number of HMI devices with logging on authorization per effective range Maximum configurable distance between transponder and HMI device 127 127 127 When using F_FB_RNG_4: 4 HMI devices When using F_FB_RNG_16: 16 HMI devices 8 m Batteries 13.2.2 Main battery Type Operation time in normal mode Operation time in stand-by mode Charging cycles Charging time Bridging battery Type Bridging time Charging cycles Lithium ion accumulator Approx. 4 h Approx. 15 days 500 Approx. 4 h 1) Lithium ion accumulator 5 min 500 1) The effective charging time depends on the ambient temperature. The higher the ambient temperature, the longer the charging time. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 311 Technical specifications 13.2 Specifications 13.2.3 Charging station Weight Supply voltage Weight without packing Approx. 1.1 kg Nominal voltage Range, permissible Transients, maximum permissible Time between two transients, minimum Current consumption with Mobile Panel Typical Constant current, maximum Power on current surge I2t Current consumption with Mobile Panel and batteries in charging compartment Typical Constant current, maximum Power on current surge I2t Fuse, internal
+24 VDC 19.2 V to 28.8 V (20%, +20%) 35 V (500 ms) 50 sec Approx. 1.5 A Approx. 1.8 A Approx. 1.7 A2s Approx. 2.8 A Approx. 3.4 A Approx. 1.7 A2s Electronic Transponder 13.2.4 Weight without batteries Power supply Operating life of batteries in normal operation Radio link to HMI device Frequency band Transmission angle Type 0,3 kg 3 AA mignon batteries, 1.5 V 5 years 2400 - 2483 MHz Approx. 93 Passive 312 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Technical specifications 13.2 Specifications 13.2.5 Description of interfaces on the HMI device USB RJ45 The figure below shows the pin assignment of the USB interface.
Pin 1 2 3 4 Assignment
+5 VDC, out (max. 100 mA) USB-DN USB-DP GND The figure below shows the pin assignment of the RJ45 interface.
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Assignment TD+
TD RD+
n. c. n. c. RD ICD+
ICD WLAN See also WLAN in accordance with IEEE 802.11 a Interfaces of the HMI device (Page 76) Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 313 Technical specifications 13.3 Radiation characteristic 13.3 Radiation characteristic Radiation characteristic of the transponder 13.3.1 Antenna type Polarization Frequency band Antenna gain Impedance Full widths at half maximum, horizontal at 2.45 GHz Full widths at half maximum, vertical at 2.45 GHz 90 Dual port patch antenna Vertical and horizontal 2400 - 2483 MHz Max. in main count direction Port 1: 2,6 dBic Port 2: 2.7 dBic 50 93 Ranges depending on angular displacement to main count direction The following figure shows the coordinate system applied to the transponder.
The figure below shows the transponder range depending on the angular displacement to the main count direction in the y direction:
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 314
-15
-30 x 8 m 7 m 6 m 5 m 4 m 3 m 2 m 1 m x
-75
-90
-105
-45
-60
-120
-135 Technical specifications 13.3 Radiation characteristic 15 30 45 60 120 135 75 y 105
-150 150
-165 165 180 The following figure shows the transponder range depending on the angular displacement to the main count direction in the z direction:
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 315 Technical specifications 13.3 Radiation characteristic
-15
-30 15 30 x 8 m 7 m 6 m 5 m 4 m 3 m 2 m 1 m
-150 150
-165 165 180 45 60 120 135 75 z 105 Radiation characteristic of HMI device Antenna type Polarization Frequency band Dual port patch antenna Vertical and horizontal 2400 - 2483 MHz Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01
-75
-90
-105
-45
-60
-120
-135 13.3.2 316 Antenna gain Technical specifications 13.3 Radiation characteristic Impedance Full widths at half maximum, horizontal at 2.45 GHz Full widths at half maximum, vertical at 2.45 GHz 80 Max. in main count direction Port 1: 2,6 dBic Port 2: 2.7 dBic 50 83 Ranges depending on angular displacement to main count direction The figure below shows the coordinate system applied to the HMI device.
The figure below shows the HMI device range depending on the angular displacement to the main count direction in the y direction:
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 317 Technical specifications 13.3 Radiation characteristic
-15
-30 15 30 x 8 m 7 m 6 m 5 m 4 m 3 m 2 m 1 m 45 60 120 135 75 y 105
-150 150
-165 165 180 The figure below shows the HMI device range depending on the angular displacement to the main count direction in the z direction:
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01
-45
-60
-120
-135
-75
-90
-105 318
-75
-90
-105
-45
-60
-120
-135 Technical specifications 13.3 Radiation characteristic 15 30
-15
-30 x 8 m 7 m 6 m 5 m 4 m 3 m 2 m 1 m 45 60 120 135 75 z 105
-150 150
-165 165 180 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 319 Appendix B.1 ESD guideline Definition of ESD B All electronic modules are equipped with large-scale integrated ICs or components. Due to their design, these electronic elements are highly sensitive to overvoltage, and thus to any electrostatic discharge. These electronic components are therefore specially identified as ESDs. Abbreviations Labeling The following abbreviation is commonly used for electrostatic sensitive devices:
EGB Elektrostatisch Gefhrdete Bauteile/Baugruppen (Germany) ESD Electrostatic Sensitive Device (internationally recognized term) ESDs are labeled with the following symbol:
Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 321 Appendix B.1 ESD guideline Electrostatic charging CAUTION Electrostatic charging ESDs may be destroyed by voltages far below the level perceived by human beings. Voltages of this kind develop when a component or an assembly is touched by a person who is not grounded against static electricity. Usually, it is unlikely that damage to an ESD as a result of overvoltage is detected immediately but may become apparent only after a longer period of operation. Prevent electrostatic charging of your body before you touch the ESD!
Anyone who is not connected to the electrical potential of their surroundings is subjected to electrostatic charging. The following figure indicates the maximum electrostatic charge anyone is subjected to when coming into contact with the materials shown. These values correspond with specifications to IEC 801-2.
Synthetic materials Wool Antistatic materials such as wood or concrete Protective measures against electrostatic discharge CAUTION Observe grounding measures When working with electrostatic sensitive devices, make sure that the person, the workplace and the packaging are properly grounded. This helps to avoid electrostatic charging. 322 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Appendix B.2 System alarms As a rule, only touch the ESD if this is unavoidable, for example for maintenance. When you touch modules, make sure that you do not touch the pins on the modules or the PCB tracks. In this way, the discharged energy cannot reach and damage the sensitive devices. Discharge electrostatic electricity from your body if you are performing measurements on an ESD. Do so by touching grounded metallic parts. Always use grounded measuring instruments. B.2 System alarms Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 323 Abbreviations C.1 Abbreviations C ANSI CPU CSV CTS DC DCD DHCP DIL DNS DP DSR DTR IO EAP ESD EMC EN ES ESD GND HF HMI IEC IEEE IF IP IWLAN LAN LED MAC MOS American National Standards Institution Central Processing Unit Comma Separated Values Clear To Send Direct Current Data Carrier Detect Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Dual-in-Line (electronic chip housing design) Domain Name System Distributed I/O Data Set Ready Data Terminal Ready Input and Output Extensible Authentication Protocol Components and modules endangered by electrostatic discharge Electromagnetic Compatibility European standard Engineering System Components and modules endangered by electrostatic discharge Ground High Frequency Human Machine Interface International Electronic Commission Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Interface Internet Protocol Industrial Wireless Local Area Network Local Area Network Light Emitting Diode Media Access Control Metal Oxide Semiconductor Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 325 Abbreviations C.1 Abbreviations MPI MS MTBF n. c. OP PC PG PPI RAM PELV RJ45 RTS RxD SAR SD Card SELV SP PLC SSID STN Sub-D TAB TCP/IP TFT TKIP TLS TxD UL USB WLAN WEP WINS WPA Multipoint Interface (SIMATIC S7) Microsoft Mean Time Between Failures Not connected Operator Panel Personal Computer Programming device Point-to-Point Interface (SIMATIC S7) Random Access Memory Protective Extra Low Voltage Registered Jack Type 45 Request to send Receive Data Specific absorption rate Security Digital Card Safety Extra Low Voltage Service Pack Programmable Logic Controller Service set identifier Super Twisted Nematic Subminiature D (plug) Tabulator Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol Thin Film Transistor Temporal Key Integrity Protocol Transport Layer Security Transmit Data Underwriters Laboratory Universal Serial Bus Wireless Local Area Network Wired Equivalent Privacy Windows Internet Naming Service Wi-Fi Protected Access 326 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Glossary
"Transfer" mode Access point Acknowledge Ad hoc mode Alarm logging An operating mode of the HMI device in which an executable project is transferred from the configuring PC to an HMI device. The access point is a WLAN participant that also performs administrative functions on the network. Acknowledgment of an alarm confirms that it has been noted. WLAN network without access point Output of user-specific alarms to a printer, in parallel to their output to the HMI device screen. Alarm, acknowledging Acknowledgment of an alarm confirms that it has been noted. Alarm, activated Moment at which an alarm is triggered by the PLC or HMI device. Alarm, deactivated Moment at which the initiation of an alarm is reset by the PLC. Alarm, user-specific A user-specific alarm designates a certain operating status of the plant connected to the HMI device via the PLC. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 327 Glossary Automation system Controller of the SIMATIC S7 series such as a SIMATIC S7-300 Bootloader Used to start the operating system. Automatically started when the HMI device is switched on. After the operating system has been loaded, the Loader opens. Configuration software Software used to generate projects used for the purpose of process visualization. An example of configuring software is WinCC flexible. Configuring PC CRC Display duration Effective range EMC Event 328 A configuring PC is a programming device or PC on which plant projects are created using an engineering software. Cyclic redundancy check Test values contained in a safety message frame can be backed up as follows:
The validity of the process values contained in the safety message frame The accuracy of the assigned address relationships The safety-related parameters Defines whether a system alarm is displayed on the HMI device and the duration of the display. Certain safety-related operator inputs are only possible in a limited area upstream of the machine or system. This is known as the effective range. To make these inputs, the operator must log onto this effective range. Electromagnetic compatibility is the ability of electrical equipment to function properly in its electromagnetic environment without influencing this environment. Functions are triggered by defined incoming events. Events can be configured. Events which can be assigned to a button include "Press" and "Release", for example. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Fail-safe Glossary Ability of a technical system to remain in a safe state or switch to another safe state immediately after certain failures occur. Fail-safe mode See Safety mode. Fail-safe system, F system Fail-safe systems are used to control processes in which immediate shutdown results in a safe system state. This means that an immediate shutdown does not result in danger to people or the environment. F systems are used in systems requiring higher levels of safety. Area reserved in configured screens for the input and output of values. Non-volatile memory with EEPROM chips, used as mobile storage medium or as memory module installed permanently on the motherboard. Field array Flash memory Function keys Key on the HMI device which supports user-specific functions. A function is assigned to the key in the configuration. The assignment of the keys may be specific to an active screen or not. Half Brightness Life Time Time period after which the brightness reaches 50% of the original value. The specified value is dependent on the operating temperature. Hardcopy HMI device Output of the screen content to a printer. An HMI device is a device used for the operation and monitoring of machines and plants. The statuses of the machine or plant are indicated by means of graphic elements or by indicator lamps on the HMI device. The operating elements of the HMI device allow the operator to interact with the processes of the machine or plant. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 329 Glossary HMI device image A file that can be transferred from the configuring PC to the HMI device. The HMI device image contains the operating system and elements of the runtime software required to run a project. An I/O field enables the input or output of values on the HMI device which are transferred to the PLC. An infotext is a configured information on objects within a project. Infotext for an alarm, for example, may contain information on the cause of the fault and troubleshooting routines. I/O field Infotext Infrastructure mode WLAN network with access point Object An object is a component of a project. Example: screen or alarm. Objects are used to view or enter texts and values on the HMI device. Operating element Component of a project used to enter values and trigger functions. A button, for example, is an operating element. Plant PLC PLC job General term referring to machines, processing centers, systems, plants and processes which are operated and monitored on an HMI device. A PLC is a general term for devices and systems with which the HMI device communicates, for example SIMATIC S7. A PLC job triggers a function for the PLC at the HMI device. Process visualization Visualization of technical processes by means of text and graphic elements. Configured plant screens allow operator intervention in active plant processes by means of the input and output data. 330 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 PROFINET Glossary Within the framework of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA), PROFINET represents an enhancement of the following bus systems:
PROFIBUS DP as well-established fieldbus Industrial Ethernet as the communications bus for the cell level The experience gained from both systems has been and continues to be integrated in PROFINET. PROFINET as an Ethernet-based automation standard from PROFIBUS International (PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e.V.) defines a vendor-independent communications and engineering model. PROFINET IO controller Device used to address the connected IO devices. That is: The IO controller exchanges input and output signals with assigned field devices. The IO controller is often the controller on which the automation program runs. PROFINET IO device A decentralized field device that is assigned to one of the IO controllers (e.g. remote IO, valve terminals, frequency converters, switches) PROFINET IO As part of PROFINET, PROFINET IO is a communication concept that is used to implement modular, distributed applications. PROFINET IO allows you to create automation solutions of the type with which you are familiar from PROFIBUS. PROFINET IO is implemented by the PROFINET standard for automation devices on the one hand, and on the other hand by the STEP 7 engineering tool. This means that you have the same application view in STEP 7 regardless of whether you configure PROFINET devices or PROFIBUS devices. Programming your user program is essentially the same for PROFINET IO and PROFIBUS DP if you use the expanded blocks and system status lists for PROFINET IO. PROFIsafe Fail-safe bus profile of PROFINET for communication between the safety program and the F I/O in an F system. PROFIsafe address Every F I/O has a PROFIsafe address. The F I/O uses this address to receive safety message frames from the F CPU or send safety message frames to the F CPU. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 331 Result of a configuration using a configuration software. The project normally contains several screens with embedded system-specific objects, basic settings and alarms. The project file of a project configured in WinCC flexible is saved under the file name extension
*.hmi. You need to distinguish between a project on the configuring PC and that on an HMI device. A project may be available in more languages on the configuring PC than can be managed on the HMI device. The project on the configuring PC can also be set up for different HMI devices. Only the runtime project that has been generated for the respective HMI device can be transferred to it. Glossary Project Project file File generated from the runtime project file for use on the HMI device. The project file is normally not transferred and remains on the configuring PC. The file name extension of a source file is *.hmi. Project file, compressed Compressed format of the project file. The compressed project file can be transferred together with the runtime project file to the respective HMI device. For this purpose, backtransfer must be enabled in the project on the configuring PC. The compressed project file is normally stored on an external memory card. The file extension of a compressed file is *.pdz. Proof-test interval The proof-test interval is the time period after which a component must be put into fail-safe state. That is, it is replaced by an unused component or it is proven to be completely error-
free. Recipe Combination of tags forming a fixed data structure. The data structure configured can be assigned data on the HMI device and is then referred to as a record. The use of recipes ensures that all the assigned data is transferred synchronously to the PLC during the transfer of a record. Runtime project file File generated from the project file for a specific HMI device. The runtime project file is transferred to the corresponding HMI device and used to operate and monitor plants. The extension of a compressed file is *.pdz. Runtime software The runtime software is a process visualization software used to test a project on a configuring PC. 332 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Glossary State of a unit in which safety is assured. In other words, the risk is acceptably low because it has been established that safety-related malfunctions do not occur or because of the safety measures taken to prevent possible safety-related malfunctions. The basic principle of the safety concept in a fail-safe system is the existence of a safe state for all process variables. Safe state Safety function Safety function is a mechanism integrated in fail-safe I/Os and CPUs, enabling them to be used in fail-safe systems. In accordance with IEC 61508: A safety function is implemented by a safety system to ensure that the system is kept in a safe state or brought into a safe state in the event of a particular fault. (user safety function) Safety integrity level Safety integrity level (SIL) in accordance with IEC 61508 and prEN 50129. The higher the safety integrity level, the more comprehensive are the measures to avoid systematic errors and control systematic errors and random hardware failures. Safety mode Operating mode of the HMI device in which safety-related communication can be performed via safety message frames. Safety-related communication Communication used to exchange fail-safe data. Screen Screen object STEP 7 Form of the visualization of all logically related process data for a plant. The visualization of the process data can be supported by graphic objects. Configured object used to display or operate the plant, for example a rectangle, I/O field or alarm view. STEP 7 is the programming software for SIMATIC S7, SIMATIC C7 and SIMATIC WinAC PLCs. Symbolic I/O field A symbolic I/O field is a field for the input and output of the value. Contains a list of default entries from which one can be selected. Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 333 Glossary System alarm Tab sequence Tag Transfer Transponder Zone A system alarm is assigned to the "System" alarm class. A system alarm refers to internal states on the HMI device and the PLC. During configuration, this defines the sequence in which objects are activated on pressing the <TAB> key. Defined memory location to which values can be written to and read from. This can be done from the PLC or the HMI device. Based on whether the tag is interconnected with the PLC or not, we distinguish between "external" tags (process tags) and "internal" tags. Transfer of a runtime project from the configuring PC to the HMI device. A transponder is a usually wireless communications, display or control device that receives incoming signals and automatically responds to them. The term transponder is derived from transmitter and responder. Transponders can be passive or active. A zone is a defined area in the system. The HMI device recognizes the zone it is in. When entering and leaving the zone, the HMI device can display a specific system image. This allows zone-specific operator inputs to be disabled or enabled. 334 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Effective ranges and transponders, 196 Plant, 196 Accessories Accessory kit, 20, 23, 26 Index
"Override" mode, 226
/Audit, 32 A Acceptance, 196 Accessory kit, 20 Charging station, 23 Transponder, 26 Acknowledge Alarm, 276 Error alarm, 276 Activate Password protection, 146 Ad hoc mode, 58 Address assignment TCP/IP network, 169 Addressing, 167 Admin, 268, 269 Agency, 7 Alarm, 271 Acknowledge, 276 Alarm indicator, 272 Display, 273 Editing, 276 Functional scope, 29 Alarm buffer, 272 Functional scope, 29 Alarm class, 271, 274 Alarm event, 271 Alarm group, 272 Alarm indicator, 272 Alarm line, 273 Alarm log, 272 Unattended in effective range, 220, 225, 233 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN, 17 Alarm report, 272 Alarm view, 273 Extended, 274 Simple, 273 Alarm window, 275 ALARM_S, 29 Alphanumerical Screen keyboard, 242 Alphanumerical value Changing, 242 Entering, 242 Ambient conditions Climatic, charging station, 53 Climatic, HMI device, 53 Climatic, transponder, 53 Tested for, 52 Application case Applications Australia Approvals, 38 Authorization, 262 Automatic Transfer, 191 B Backlighting Reducing, 152 Setting, 137 Automation License Manager, 215 Backtransfer, 190, 193 Backup, 136, 178, 188, 200, 201, 203, 262 Registry information, 136, 150 Temporary files, 150 to external memory medium, 136 To external storage device, 177 To memory card, 177 With ProSave, 203 With WinCC flexible, 201 Backup time Internal clock, 310 Bar, 251 Basic knowledge Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 335 Charging in the charging compartment, 120 Index Required, 4 BAT BAT 1 BAT 2 LED, 98 LED, 122 LED, 122 Batteries Battery, 246 Application, 246 Charging options, 22 Layout, 246 LED display, 87 Maintenance cycle, 301 Operation, 246 Purpose, 22 State, 181 Battery charging status Vibration alarm, 159 Battery status Display, 87, 136 BGIA approval, 38 Booting, 156 Bridging battery, 21, 22 Changing, 89 Insert, 85 Safety instruction, 88, 90 Brightness Changing, 152 Browser Homepage, 136 Setting, 136 Byte assignment Direct keys, 107 C Calibrating Touch screen, 144 Care, 301 CE approval, 37 Certificate Delete, 136, 176 Display, 136 Importing, 136, 176 Certificates, 136 Certifications, 37 Changing Brightness, 152 Screen setting, 152 User data, 268 Character repeat, 136 Screen keyboard, 141 Setting, 141 Charging Electrostatic, 322 Charging options Battery, 22 Charging station, 21 Charging compartment, 120 Clearance, 55 Configuration, 22 EMC-compliant installation, 46 LED display, 122 Lock, 123 Main dimensions, 307 Mounting location, 54 Mounting position, 66 Charging status of battery Vibration alarm, 159 Transport conditions, 48 Climatic Closing Project, 269 Column sequence Alarm view, 274 COM LED, 97 Commissioning engineers, 3 Communication error, 29, 233 Compatibility conflict, 201 Configuration phase, 24 Configure Network, 168 Operating system, 125 Screen keyboard, 136, 140 Configuring PC, 24 Connecting, 78 Connection graphic, 78 Connecting Configuring PC, 78 PLC, 79 Printer, 80 USB device, 81 Connection Electrical, 69 Connection graphic Configuring PC, 78 PLC on Mobile Panel, 80 Printer, 80 Connection to PLCs Number, 32 Control Panel 336 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Index Open, 135 Operating, 137 Password protection, 127 Screen keyboard, 138 Cookies, 136, 175 Country code, 129 CRC checksum Determining, 197 Creating Recipe data record, 285, 292 Users, 266 Currency, 137 D Data channel Enabling, 160 Locking, 160 Parameter assignment, 137, 160 Data flow, 280 Data record list, 281, 291 Data transfer rate to Access Point, 130 Date, 136 Entering, 243 Setting, 147 Synchronizing, 148 Date format, 137, 149 Date/time properties, 136, 147 Deactivating Password protection, 147 Decimal, 241 Default Gateway, 170 Degree of protection Delay time Setting, 137, 162 Delete Certificate, 176 Recipe data record, 287, 294 Users, 269 Design variations, 18 Device name For network operation, 168 Setting, 137 DHCP, 170 Direct key, 107, 234 Bit coding, 108 Byte assignment, 107 Functional scope, 31 Reaction time, 110 Display Safety instruction, 76, 79, 178, 205 Alarm, 273 Battery status, 87 HMI device information, 136 Infotext, 244, 275 Memory information, 159 Specifications, 308 System information, 158 Display format, 240 Disposal, 7 DNS, 170 Server, 167 Documentation Conventions, 6 Enclosed, 65 Getting started, 4 Operating instructions, 5 User manual, 4 Double-click, 136 Setting, 143 Drop down list box, 244 E EC Declaration of Conformity, 37 Editing Alarm, 276 Recipe data record, 286, 293 Effective range Calculating quality, 249 Detect, 62 Leaving without logging off, 225 Logoff, 226 Logon, 224 Effective range name, 247 Layout, 247 Effective range quality, 248 Application, 248 Operation, 249 Effective ranges, 27 Acceptance, 196 Forming, 62 Rules, 58, 63 Specifying, 64 Testing, 199 Electrical Installation, 69 Electrostatic charging, 322 Electrostatic discharge Precautions, 322 Element list, 281, 292 E-mail Setting, 137, 172 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 337 Index EMC, 46 Guideline, 37 Emergency stop, 220 Emergency stop button Effectiveness, 40, 44 Operating, 43, 101 Release, 101 Safety instruction, 43 Emission, 42, 47 Enabling button, 44, 102 Operating, 103 Panic activation, 104 Risk from improper use, 46 Safety instruction, 46 Switch settings, 103 Enabling device, 44 Encryption, 175 Entering Alphanumerical value, 242 By means of function key, 237 Date, 243 Numerical value, 241 Recipe data record, 298 Symbolic value, 244 Text box, 239 Time, 243 Error alarm Acknowledge, 276 Error display Red, 233 ESD Abbreviations, 321 Labeling, 321 Safety instruction, 68 Ethernet settings IP address, 170 Evaluation Operator control, 96 Exporting Recipe data record, 296 Extended alarm view, 274 Extended recipe view, 281 Extended user view, 264 External memory medium Backup to, 177 Restoring from, 177 F Factory settings Resetting to, 205 Fail-safe Automation system, 28 Using the HMI device, 28 Fail-safe mode Specifications, 310 Feedback Optical, 236 Front view, 18, 305 Function keys Global function assignment, 237 Input via, 237 Labeling, 116 Local function assignment, 237 Function test, 93, 301 Functional scope Alarm buffer, 29 ALARM_S, 29 Alarms, 29 Device-specific, 32 Graphics list, 29 Infotext, 31 Limit value monitoring, 29 Log, 30 Recipe, 30 Safety, 31 Scaling, 29 Screen, 30 Tag, 29 Text list, 29 Functions Additional, 31 G Gauge, 251 Global rampdown, 221 Graphics list Functional scope, 29 H Handwheel Application, 111 Evaluate incremental values, 111 Operating, 104 Reaction time, 110 High frequency radiation, 36 HMI device Emergency stop button, 100 Enabling button, 102 Holding, 118, 119 Information, 136, 157 338 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Index Ports, 76, 309 Restart, 156 Restarting, 136 Specifications, 308 Storing, 219 Switch off, 93 HMI Input Panel Options, 140 Homepage Internet, 174 Host cable Safety instruction, 78 I Identification, 171 Illuminated pushbutton Application, 112 Bit assignment, 112 Operating, 106 Importing Certificate, 176 Recipe data record, 297 Infotext Display, 244, 275 Functional scope, 31 Initial startup, 189 Input Panel, 136 Input unit, 96 Specifications, 309 Installation Electrical, 69 EMC-compliant, 46 Installing Integrating, 222 Interference Pulse-shaped, 46 Sinusoidal, 47 Internal clock, 148, 310 Internal error, 233 Internet Homepage, 174 Options, 136 Search engine, 174 Security settings, 136 Service, 7, 303 Settings, 137, 172 Support, 7, 303 Internet Explorer, 127 Internet options Privacy, 175 Option, 188, 212, 213, 214 IP address Ethernet, 170 Setting, 136 K Key control Trend view, 256 Keyboard Safety instruction, 96 Keyboard properties, 136, 141 Key-operated switch Application, 112 Bit assignment, 112 Operating, 105 L Labeling Function keys, 116 Labeling strips, 20 Attaching, 117 Dimensions, 117 Exchange, 118 Printing, 117 LAN connection, 136 Language change Functional scope, 31 Layout Battery, 246 Slider control, 252 Sm@rtClient view, 259 Trend view, 255 Leaving the effective range Vibration alarm, 159 LED BAT, 98 BAT 1, 122 BAT 2, 122 COM, 97 POWER, 122 PWR, 97 RNG, 98 SAFE, 97 LED display Battery, 87 Charging station, 122 Mobile Panel, 96 LED function key Application, 110 Bit assignment, 111 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 339 Index License key, 215 Transferring, 189, 216 Transferring back, 189, 217 Limit value For password, 263 For user, 263 For user view, 263 Limit value monitoring Functional scope, 29 Limit value test, 241 Loader Buttons, 125 Open, 126 Local rampdown, 221 Log Functional scope, 30 Logbook Logoff WLAN connection, 134 Effective range, 226 Users, 266 Logoff time, 262 Logon Effective range, 224 Users, 264 Logon data, 171 M Main battery, 21, 22 Changing in good time, 88 Insert, 86 Main battery change Block of USB interface, 82 Main dimensions Charging station, 307 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN, 305 Transponder, 308 Maintenance, 301, 302 Maintenance technicians, 3 Manual Production sequence, 299 Transfer, 190 Measures Mechanical Organizational, 219 Transport conditions, 48 Memory Specifications, 309 Memory card, 21 Inserting, 115 Restoring file system, 150 Unplug, 116 Memory information, 137 Display, 159 Memory management, 136, 182 Mobile Panel Applications, 17 Design variations, 18 Front view, 18 Information, 157 LED display, 96 Ports, 76 Rear view, 19 Side view, 19 Switching on, 91 Testing, 91 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Main dimensions, 305 Monitor setting Changing, 136 Monitoring mode Sm@rtClient view, 259 Mounting location Charging station, 54 Mounting position Charging station, 66 Mouse properties, 136, 143 Multi-key operation, 236, 237 Multimedia card, 21, 114 N Name server, 170 Setting, 136 Network Configure, 168 Logon data, 136 Set up, 167 Setting, 169 Network & dial-up connections, 136 Network and dial-up connections, 136 Network ID, 136 Network operation Device name, 168 Options, 136, 137, 172 Nominal voltage, 57 NOTE License key, 212 Number format, 137, 149 Numerical Screen keyboard, 240 Numerical value Changing, 241 340 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Decimal places, 241 Display format, 240 Entering, 241 Limit value test, 241 O Offices, 7 Offline Operating mode, 186 Recipe tag, 284 Test, 195 Online Operating mode, 187 Recipe tag, 284 Test, 195 OP properties, 136 Device, 157 Memory monitoring, 182 Persistent storage, 150 Touch, 144 Open Loader, 126 Operating Control Panel, 137 Emergency stop button, 43, 101 Enabling button, 103 Feedback, 236 Handwheel, 104 Illuminated pushbutton, 106 Key-operated switch, 105 Recipe menu, 292 Recipe screen, 285, 292 Safety instruction, 119 Slider control, 253 Switches, 254 Trend view, 255 With external keyboard, 235 With external mouse, 235 Operating instructions Purpose of, 3 Scope, 4 Operating mode, 186 Changing, 186 Offline, 186 Online, 187 Transfer, 92, 187 Operating safety Standards, 39, 43 Operating system Configure, 125 Update via ProSave, 207 Index Updating, 204, 205 Updating using WinCC flexible, 206 Operation Battery, 246 Operation feedback, 236 Operator control Evaluation, 96 Functions, 96 Recipe view, 285 Selection, 96 Simple recipe view, 291 Operators, 3 Optical feedback, 236 Option Installing, 188, 212 Installing with ProSave, 214 Installing with WinCC flexible, 213 Removing, 188, 212 Removing with ProSave, 215 Removing with WinCC flexible, 213 Options, 32 Network operation, 136, 137, 172 P Panic activation Enabling button, 104 Parameter assignment Data channel, 137, 160 Password, 262 Backup, 262 Restoring, 262 Specifying, 146 Password list, 262 Password properties, 137, 146 Password protection, 127, 137 Activate, 146 Deactivating, 147 PELV, 41 Peripherals Rated load, 82 RJ45 socket, 313 USB socket, 313 Acceptance, 196 Plant PLC Permission in remote control, 260 Pin assignment Connecting, 79 Connection graphic, 80 Number, 32 Reading recipe data record, 289, 295 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 341 Transferring recipe data record, 290, 295 Index PLC, 32 PLC_User, 268, 269 Ports, 76 HMI device, 309 POWER LED, 122 Power failure, 201, 205 Power Save 1, 98, 152 Power Save 2, 98, 152 Power supply, 41 Charging station, 41 Tabletop power supply unit, 41 Precautions Printer Electrostatic discharge, 322 Connecting, 80 Connection graphic, 80 Setting, 137 Printer connection Setting, 154 Printer properties, 137, 154 Printing Labeling strips, 117 Via network printer, 168 Production sequence Manual, 299 PROFINET, 167 Addressing, 167 PROFINET IO Disabling direct keys, 165 Enabling direct keys, 165 Setting, 137 PROFIsafe, 33 PROFIsafe address Setting, 137 Project Closing, 269 Offline testing, 195 Reuse, 187 Testing online, 195 Transferring, 188, 189 Project file, compressed Memory location, 163 Proper use, 35 Protection against ingress of solid foreign bodies, 57 Protection against water, 57 Protective foil, 20 Protocol, 33 Proxy Server, 136, 172, 174 Setting, 136 PWR LED, 97 R Radiation High frequency, 36 Radio interference, 42 Emission, 47 Rampdown Safety instruction, 118 Rate Control, 130 Rated load USB interface, 82 Reading Recipe data record, 289 Reading out Recipe data record, 295 Real-time clock Internal, 148 Rear view, 19 Recipe, 277 Control, 279 Data flow, 280 Data record, 278 Field of application, 277 Functional scope, 30 Recipe screen, 280 Recipe view, 280 Synchronizing tags, 288 Recipe data record Creating, 285, 292 Delete, 287, 294 Editing, 286, 293 Entering, 298 Exporting, 296 Importing, 297 Reading from PLC, 289, 295 Synchronize with PLC, 286 Transferring to PLC, 290, 295 Recipe list, 281, 291 Recipe menu Operating, 292 Recipe screen, 282 Operating, 285, 292 Overview, 282 Recipe tag Offline, 284 Online, 284 Synchronizing, 283, 288 Recipe view, 280 Extended, 281 342 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Index Menu items, 291 Operator control, 285, 291 Simple, 281 Recommissioning, 189 Recycling, 7 Red error display, 233 Regional and language settings, 137, 149 Regional settings, 149 Registered trademarks, 6 Registry information Backup, 136, 150 Regulations for the prevention of accidents, 35 Remote control Forcing permission, 260 Start, 260 Removing, 223 Option, 188, 212, 213, 215 Repairs, 302 Replacement key set, 303 Reset button, 77 Resetting to factory settings with ProSave, 210 Resetting to factory settings with WinCC flexible, 208 Restore, 136, 178 Restoring, 188, 200, 202, 203, 262 From external memory medium, 136 From external storage device, 177 From memory card, 150 With ProSave, 203 With WinCC flexible, 202 Restoring factory settings, 79, 188, 205 Return Center, 302 Risk analysis, 43 Risk evaluation Special mode, 45 Risk from improper use Enabling button, 46 RJ45 socket Safety instruction, 77 RNG LED, 98 Rotary coding switch Transponder, 66 Ruler Trend view, 255 S S7, 32 SAFE LED, 97 Safe electrical separation, 41 Safe state, 28 Safety Functional scope, 31 Standards, 39, 43 Safety instruction, 35, 114 Backlighting, 153 Bridging battery, 88, 90 Category 0 Stop, 44 Category 1 Stop, 44 Changed tag name, 288 Compatibility conflict, 201 Compressed project file, 190 Data channel, 206 Data loss, 205 Degree of protection, 178 Degree of protection, 76, 79 Degree of protection, 205 Direct key, 234 Electrostatic charging, 322 Emergency stop button, 36, 43, 54, 71, 84, 101, 114 Enabling button, 36, 45, 46 ESD, 68 General, 42 High frequency radiation, 36 Impact effect, 36 Keyboard, 96 Leaving the WLAN coverage area, 234 License keys, 205 Malfunctions, 84 Memory card, first use, 116 Memory distribution, 159 Multi-key operation, 236 Observe grounding measures, 322 Operating the HMI device, 119 Path, 163 Power failure, 201, 205 Power supply, 41 Preventing inadvertent operation, 301 Project file, 163 Rampdown, 118 Recipe data record in the background, 282 Restart, 156 RJ45 socket, 77 Sample cycle time, 110 Shutdown, 225 Storage, 48 Switching infotext, 245 Time-dependent reactions, 149 Touch screen, 96 Transfer mode, 162 Transfer mode channel 2, 162 Transport, 48 Unintentional action, 238 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 343 Index USB connection sequence, 78 USB Host-to-Host cable, 78 USB interface, 82 SAR, 47 Scaling Functional scope, 29 Scope of delivery, 65 Screen Functional scope, 30 Screen keyboard, 136, 239 Adjust size, 139 Alphanumerical, 242 Change layout, 139 Character repeat, 141 Configure, 140 For Control Panel, 138 Keyboard level, 242 Language change, 242 Move, 139 Numerical, 240 Representation types, 138 Screen saver, 137, 153 Setting, 152 Screen setting Changing, 152 Search engine Internet, 174 Security settings, 136 Security system, 261 Selection Operator control, 96 Service On the Internet, 7, 303 Service pack, 302 Service technicians, 3 Set up Network, 167 Setting Backlighting, 137 Browser, 136 Character repeat, 141 Date, 147 Date format, 149 Date/Time, 136 Delay time, 137, 162 Device name, 137 Double-click, 143 E-mail, 137 E-mail connection, 172 IP address, 136 Language, 238 Name server, 136 Network, 169 Number format, 149 Printer connection, 154 PROFINET IO, 137 PROFIsafe address, 137 Proxy, 136 Regional data, 149 Screen saver, 152 Time, 147 Time format, 149 Transponder ID, 68 Setting language, 238 Settings Internet, 137 Language, 137 Regional, 137 Shutdown, 221 Safety instruction, 225 Side view, 19, 306 Siemens HMI input panel options, 136 SIMATIC Logon, 262 SIMATIC S7, 32 Simple alarm view, 273 Simple recipe view, 281 Menu items, 291 Operator control, 291 Simple user view, 264 Slider control, 252 Sm@rtAccess, 32 Sm@rtClient view, 259, 260 Monitoring mode, 259 Usage, 259 Sm@rtService, 32 SMTP server, 172 Software options, 32 Sort order Alarm view, 274 Special mode Risk evaluation, 45 Specifications Display, 308 Fail-safe mode, 310 HMI device, 308 Input unit, 309 Memory, 309 Supply voltage, 309, 312 Weight, 312 Standard input unit, 96 Standards, 38 Start HMI device, 156 Status Force, 256 344 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Index Touch operation, 258 Stop Safety instruction, 44 Subnet Mask, 170 Supply voltage, 312 Specifications, 309 Support On the Internet, 7, 303 Switch off HMI device, 93 Switch setting Enabling button, 103 Switches, 253 Switching on Mobile Panel, 91 Switch-off behavior Emergency stop, 220 Global rampdown, 221 In the plant, 220 Local rampdown, 221 Shutdown, 221 Trigger, 221 Symbolic value Changing, 244 Entering, 244 Synchronizing Date and time, 148 Recipe tag, 283, 288 System, 158 Acceptance, 196 System functions, 107 System information, 137 Display, 158 System properties, 137 Device name, 168 General, 158 Memory, 159 T Tabletop power supply unit, 21, 77 Connecting, 82 Tag Functional scope, 29 Task planner Functional scope, 31 TCP/IP address, 169 Technical support, 7 Temporary files Backup, 150 Test For ambient conditions, 52 Test voltages, 56 Testing Mobile Panel, 91 Text box, 239 Text list Functional scope, 29 Time, 136 Entering, 243 Setting, 147 Synchronizing, 148 Time format, 137, 149 Time zone Setting, 147 Time-dependent reactions, 149 Touch operation Trend view, 256 Touch screen Calibrating, 136, 144 Safety instruction, 96 Training center, 7 Transfer, 187, 189, 190 Automatic, 191 Cancel, 92 Manual, 190 Transfer settings, 137, 160 Transfer Settings Channel, 160 Directories, 162 Transferring License key, 189, 216 Project, 188, 189 Recipe data record, 290, 295 Transferring back License key, 189, 217 Transponder, 21 Acceptance, 196 Detect, 62 Inserting the battery, 68 Installation, 69 Main dimensions, 308 Rotary coding switch, 66 Rules, 60 Rules, 60 Transponder ID Setting, 68 Transport conditions, 48 Transport damage, 65 Trend view, 254 Key control, 256 Touch operation, 256 Trends Functional scope, 31 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 345 Index Limit violation, 255 TV, 38 U UL approval, 37 Unattended in effective range Application case, 220, 225, 233 Unintentional action, 236, 238 Updating About ProSave, 207 Operating system, 204 Using WinCC flexible, 206 Updating the operating system, 188 Usage Conditions, 51 Geographical, 42 In industry, 42 In residential areas, 42 With additional measures, 51 USB Connection sequence, 78 USB connection sequence Safety instruction, 78 USB device Connecting, 81 USB FlashDrive, 21 USB interface Block during main battery change, 82 Rated load, 82 USB socket, 77 Pin assignment, 313 USB stick, 21 User data Backup, 262 Changing, 268 Restoring, 262 User group, 262 User manual, 4 User name, 171 User view, 263 Extended, 264 Simple, 264 Users, 262 Admin, 268, 269 Creating, touch operation, 266 Delete, 269 Logoff, 266 Logon, 264 PLC_User, 268, 269 V Value table Trend view, 255 VBScript Functional scope, 31 Vibration alarm, 136 Activate, 159 W Weight, 312 WinCC flexible internet settings, 137 E-mail, 172 Windows CE taskbar, 125 Password protection, 127 WINS, 170 Server, 167 Wireless approval, 38 WLAN Authentication, 133 Encryption, 133 Interface, 313 Network key, 133 Password, 133 WLAN connection Logbook, 134 WLAN network Connect, 132 WLAN networks Connection sequence, 133 Creating new, 132 Display available, 131 Parameter assignment, 132 WLAN quality, 246 Application, 246 Operation, 247 WLAN range, 27 Z Zone Calculating quality, 250 Detect, 62 Zone name, 249 Layout, 249 Operation, 250 Zone quality, 250 Application, 250 Layout, 250 Operation, 251 Zones 346 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 Rules, 59 Testing, 200 Index Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Operating Instructions, 12/2007, A5E01003940-01 347
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2008-11-25 | 5725 ~ 5825 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | Original Equipment |
2 | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral | |||
3 | 2008-11-24 | 2441 ~ 2441 | DTS - Digital Transmission System |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 | Effective |
2008-11-25
|
||||
1 2 3 |
2008-11-24
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Siemens AG
|
||||
1 2 3 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0016367492
|
||||
1 2 3 | Physical Address |
Werner-von-Siemens-Str. 50
|
||||
1 2 3 |
1963
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
amberg, N/A 92224
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
Germany
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 3 | TCB Application Email Address |
J******@eurofins.de
|
||||
1 2 3 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
1 2 3 |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
|||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 3 | Grantee Code |
U9A
|
||||
1 2 3 | Equipment Product Code |
277IWLAN-V100
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 3 | Name |
A**** G****
|
||||
1 2 3 | Telephone Number |
+49 9******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 3 | Fax Number |
++49-********
|
||||
1 2 3 |
A******@siemens.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 3 | Firm Name |
Siemens AG
|
||||
1 2 3 | Name |
M******** O******** O******
|
||||
1 2 3 | Physical Address |
Siemensstr. 2-4
|
||||
1 2 3 |
2355
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
Fuerth, 90713
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
Germany
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Telephone Number |
+49 9******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 3 | Fax Number |
+49 9********
|
||||
1 2 3 |
M******@siemens.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 3 | Firm Name |
Siemens AG
|
||||
1 2 3 | Name |
M**** O****** O********
|
||||
1 2 3 | Physical Address |
Siemensstr. 2-4
|
||||
1 2 3 |
2355
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
Fuerth, 90713
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
Germany
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Telephone Number |
+49 9******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 3 | Fax Number |
+49 9********
|
||||
1 2 3 |
M******@siemens.com
|
|||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 3 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 3 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | Equipment Class | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||||
1 2 3 | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral | |||||
1 2 3 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |||||
1 2 3 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Mobile Panel 277 IWLAN | ||||
1 2 3 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 3 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 2 3 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | Grant Comments | Power Output listed is conducted. Operation in portable RF exposure conditions is limited to the specific final-product and antenna configurations evaluated in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except as described in filings under this FCC ID. End users must be provided with operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance requirements. The highest reported body SAR values per band for this FCC ID are: 2.4 GHz 0.0068 W/kg; 5.5 GHz 0.000 W/kg | ||||
1 2 3 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 3 | Firm Name |
Eurofins Product Service GmbH
|
||||
1 2 3 | Name |
R******** K********
|
||||
1 2 3 | Telephone Number |
49-33********
|
||||
1 2 3 | Fax Number |
49-33********
|
||||
1 2 3 |
r******@eurofins.de
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15E | CC | 5150 | 5350 | 0.0445 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 15E | CC | 5470 | 5725 | 0.0391 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 3 | 15E | CC | 5725 | 5825 | 0.0456 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15B | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2412 | 2462 | 0.094 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2441 | 2441 | 0.0000078 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC